HP Color LaserJet 9500 Printer series Technical Reference
HP Color LaserJet 9500 Printer series is a high-performance printing solution designed to meet the demands of busy workgroups and small businesses. With its advanced features and capabilities, the HP Color LaserJet 9500 Printer series can help you produce professional-quality documents quickly and efficiently.
Advertisement
Advertisement
software technical reference
hp
color LaserJet 9500
hp Color LaserJet 9500 series printers software technical reference
Copyright
(c) 2003 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, LP
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
Edition 1, 6/2003
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Trademark Credits
Adobe (R), Acrobat (R), PostScript
(R), and the PostScript 3 (TM) are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries/regions.
Arial (R) is a U.S. registered trademark of the Monotype
Corporation.
Corel (R) is a trademark of Corel
Corporation or Corel Corporation
Ltd.
Helvetica* and Times* are trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries in the U.S.
and other countries/regions.
Intel (R) is a U.S. trademark of Intel
Corporation.
HP-UX Release 10.20 and later and P-UX RElease 11.00 and later
(in both 32- and 64-bit configurations) on all HP 9000 computers are Open Group UNIX
95 branded products.
Microsoft (R), MS-DOS (R),
Windows (R), and Windows NT (R) are U.S. registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Netscape and Netscape Navigator are trademarks or registered trademarks of Netscape
Communications, Inc.
Pentium (R) is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
TrueType (TM) is a U.S. trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
UNIX (R) is a registered trademark of the Open Group.
Table of Contents
List of tables
List of figures
1 Purpose and scope
2 Software description
Software Technical Reference ENWW
3
4
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003..............................45
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003.................................52
Software Technical Reference ENWW
3 Printer driver features
Stapling Options dialog box ......................................................................................................73
Fold/Saddle Stitch option........................................................................................................73
Software Technical Reference ENWW
5
6
Software Technical Reference ENWW
Adobe PostScript (R) 3 (TM) emulation support for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer.....121
Software Technical Reference ENWW
7
8
Software Technical Reference ENWW
Software Technical Reference ENWW
9
10
Software Technical Reference ENWW
Software Technical Reference ENWW
11
12
4 Installing Windows printing system components
5 Installation for Macintosh, IBM OS/2, and Linux operating systems
Software Technical Reference ENWW
Folders and files added through installation of the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software (Mac OS) ...242
6 Engineering Detail
Index
Software Technical Reference ENWW
13
List of tables
14
Software Technical Reference ENWW
Software Technical Reference ENWW
15
16
Software Technical Reference ENWW
List of figures
Software Technical Reference ENWW
17
18
Software Technical Reference ENWW
Software Technical Reference ENWW
19
20
Software Technical Reference ENWW
1
Purpose and scope
Note
Introduction
This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the printing-system software for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer.
This document is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer Care Center (CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information systems (MIS) personnel, and
HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer end users, as appropriate.
The following information is included in this technical reference:
• descriptions of drivers and platforms with system modifications
• procedures for installing and uninstalling software components
• descriptions of problems that can arise while using the printer, and known solutions to those problems
An addendum to this STR includes system modification information and descriptions of known software issues and workarounds.
Note
The following table contains descriptions of the printer models that are described in this STR. The printing-system software for each printer model accommodates the differences between models.
Bundle configurations might vary among countries/regions.
HP LaserJet Color 9500 series printer models
Table 1: Features of the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer models
HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer
Memory
•
128 megabytes (MB) randomaccess memory (RAM)
•
256 MB RAM
•
Expandable to 384 MB RAM
•
10 gigabytes (GB) hard drive
Speed
•
Expandable to 384 MB RAM
•
Optional hard disk available
• 24 pages per minute (ppm) A4sized color or black and white
• 25 ppm Letter-sized color or black and white
•
• 24 ppm A4-sized color or black and white
25 ppm Letter-sized color or black and white
Software Technical Reference ENWW Introduction
21
Connectivity
Paper handling
Resolution
Print cartridges
•
•
IEEE 1284 type-C parallel connection
•
HP Jetdirect print server enhanced input/output (EIO) network card
•
HP Jet-Link
•
HP Fast InfraRed (FIR) Connect
•
Foreign Interface Harness connection (FIH)
Up to three open EIO expansion slots are available to support
HP Jetdirect EIO cards
•
One 100-sheet multipurpose tray
(tray 1); maximum paper size,
306 mm by 470 mm (12 inches by
18.46 inches)
•
Two 500-sheet trays (trays 2 and
3); maximum paper size 297 mm by 432 mm (11.7 inches by 17 inches)
•
Optional duplexer; supports all standard and custom sizes; does not support envelopes, labels, or transparencies
•
600 dots per inch (dpi)
• Four 25,000-page color print cartridges (black, cyan, yellow, and magenta)
• Four 40,000-page color image drums (black, cyan, yellow, and magenta)
•
IEEE 1284 type-C parallel connection
•
HP Jetdirect print server EIO network card
•
HP Jet-Link
•
HP Fast InfraRed (FIR) Connect
•
Foreign Interface Harness connection (FIH)
• up to three open enhanced input/ output (EIO) expansion slots are available to support HP Jetdirect
EIO cards
•
One 100-sheet multipurpose tray
(tray 1); maximum paper size,
306 mm by 470 mm (12 inches by
18.46 inches)
•
Two 500-sheet trays (trays 2 and
3); maximum paper size 297 mm by 432 mm (11.7 inches by 17 inches)
•
One 2000 sheet tray (tray 4); maximum paper size, 297 mm by
432 mm (11.7 inches by 17 inches)
•
Duplexer; supports all standard and custom sizes; does not support envelopes, labels, or transparencies
•
Optional HP 3000-Sheet Stacker; maximum paper size, 306 mm by
470 mm (12 inches by 18.5 inches)
• Optional HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/
Stacker; maximum paper size,
306 mm by 470 mm (12 inches by
18.5 inches)
•
Optional HP Multifunction Finisher; maximum paper size, 306 mm by
470 mm (12 by 18.5 inches)
•
600 dpi
• Four 25,000-page color print cartridges (black, cyan, yellow, and magenta)
• Four 40,000-page color image drums (black, cyan, yellow, and magenta)
22
HP LaserJet Color 9500 series printer models Software Technical Reference ENWW
2
Software description
Introduction
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer comes with software and installers for Microsoft (R) Windows (R) and Apple
Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux, UNIX (R) and OS/2 systems are supported, and software is available on the
Web. For information about specific system installers, drivers, and components, locate the section that corresponds to that system.
Note
Supported operating systems
The following operating systems (OSs) support the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software, including standard printer command language (PCL) drivers and PostScript (R) 3 emulation (PS) drivers. Windows OSs support a fullfeatured configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer; other OSs support varying levels of functionality.
•
Windows 95
•
Windows 98
•
Windows Millennium Edition (Me)
•
Windows NT (R) (Service packs 3 through 6)
•
Windows 2000 (Service packs 1 and 2)
•
Windows XP Home Edition and Windows XP Professional (Service pack 1)
•
Windows Server 2003
Throughout this guide, Windows XP is used to denote both Windows XP Home Edition and Windows XP
Professional.
Additional operating environments
The following operating environments also support the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing system:
• Windows Terminal Server
• Citrix Terminal Server
• Windows Cluster Server
•
Mac OS 8.6 to 9.
x
and Mac OS X (10.1 or later)
•
IBM OS/2 (available at
http://www.ibm.com
)
•
Linux (available at
http://www.hp.com/go/linux
)
•
Unix (available at
http://www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
)
•
HP mobile printing driver (available at
http://www.hp.com/support/mpd100
)
For more information, go to:
http://www.hp.com/support/lj9500
.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Introduction
23
Technology background information
This section contains information about the following topics:
•
HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer drivers
•
HP Color LaserJet 9500 user documentation
•
Bidirectional communication
•
Driver Autoconfiguration
•
HP Embedded Web Server
•
Printer Status and Alerts
•
Remote firmware update
•
Euro character
HP LaserJet printer drivers
HP LaserJet printer drivers for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer control the print settings. These printer drivers differ, depending on the operating system environment. The following drivers are available on the printing-system software
CD-ROM:
•
HP traditional PCL 6 driver for Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
•
HP traditional PCL 5c driver for Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
•
HP traditional PS driver for Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
•
HP PCL 6 unidriver for Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
•
HP PCL 5c unidriver for Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
•
HP PS unidriver for Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
You gain access to the drivers through onscreen windows, or driver tabs, that offer dialog boxes with printer settings.
The driver tabs are available in the software application from which you send your print jobs to the printer and from your computer control panel.
The graphical user interface (GUI) of the driver tabs differs from driver to driver. The GUI of the HP traditional PS driver is significantly different from the GUI of the HP traditional PCL 6 and HP PCL 5c drivers. The HP PCL 6,
HP PCL 5c and HP PS unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 have a uniform general appearance.
See Chapter 3, "Driver features," for detailed information about each of the HP printer drivers.
HP LaserJet user documentation
Adobe(R) Acrobat Reader(R)
Note
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 software compact disk read-only memory (CD-ROM) includes Adobe Acrobat Reader for viewing online documentation. When you click any of the documentation links on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software
CD-ROM, the installer scans the system for an installed portable document format (PDF) reader. If the installer cannot find a reader, the installer presents the option to install the Adobe Acrobat Reader.
Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later is required to view the documents on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-
ROM.
24
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
HP LaserJet guides
On the CD-ROM that came with the printer, the following guides for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer are supplied in
Adobe Acrobat Reader .PDF files for viewing on your computer.
•
User Reference Guide
for the HP Color LaserJet 9500: A full-size, comprehensive version of the User Guide.
•
User Guide
for the HP Color LaserJet 9500: An electronic copy of the printed, minimized version of the User
Reference Guide that comes with the printer and is installed inside the front doors of the printer.
You can either view the guides from the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM or install them on your system. To view the guides from the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM, click
printer documentation
on the main screen, and then click the guide you want to view. To install the online user guides, select the
User Guide
check box during a Custom Installation. The guide is installed in the
Manuals
folder on the target system. You can also choose to install the guides later, or to read the guide on the printing-system software CD-ROM by navigating to
<language>/
Manuals
.
In accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Hewlett-Packard provides readable, onscreen versions of the
User Reference Guide
for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 at:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj9500
A hyperlinked, screen-readable version of the
User Reference Guide
for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 is available on the printer software CD-ROM. To view the user guide, navigate to the
<language>
folder for your language, and then to the
Manuals
folder. There, open the file with this file name:
LJ9500_USER_REFERENCE.CHM
HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system install notes
The
HP Color LaserJet 9500 Printing System Install Notes
are available on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printingsystem software CD-ROM. The install notes (file name LJ9500_INSTALL_NOTES.RTF) contain important information about printer features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and technical assistance.
To view this text file from the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM, click
printer documentation
on the main screen of the CD-ROM, and then click
install notes
.
You can also gain access to the file by inserting the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, navigating to
<language>
, and then clicking the file name LJ9500_INSTALL_NOTES.RTF. When you have the file open in Wordpad, you can click
File
, and then click
Save As
to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
The
Hewlett-Packard Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
can be viewed from the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-
ROM by clicking
printer documentation
from the installer main screen and then clicking
hp jetdirect guide
. The guide is installed in the
Manuals
folder on the target system. You can also choose to install the guide later, or to read the guide on the printing-system software CD-ROM by navigating to
<language>/Manuals
, and then clicking the file name HPJDAG.PDF.
HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system release notes
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 Printing-System Release notes, late-breaking information, and other technical assistance, are available at:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj9500
Bidirectional communication
Bidirectional communication is the printer capability to respond to data inquiries from the computer and report back information, such as what type of print media is available or what accessories are connected to the printer. If a printer
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
25
does not have this capability (that is, if it has no bidirectional mode), it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report back information.
Driver Autoconfiguration and Printer Status and Alerts use bidirectional communications software. The Typical
Installation installs Driver Autoconfiguration in supported environments that contain the bidirectional communication software. Use Custom Installation when you do not want these features.
Bidirectional communication depends on the operating system on which your network runs and on the type of connection you have between your computer and your printer.
The following tables provide information about bidirectional communication availability in various operating systems and network environments.
Table 2: Bidirectional communication availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share
Method Connection type Microsoft Windows
95 98 Me NT 4.0 2000
1
XP
1, 3
Microsoft Share
9
x
/NT 4.0
host
2000/XP host
1
Installer Direct connect
Network
USB (DOT4)
Parallel
Jetdirect TCP/IP
IPX/SPX x
Standard TCP/IP x
(HP)
TCP/IP
(MS)
IPX/SPX
(HP) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2
1- In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the bidirectional-communication components that are installed for HP PCL 5c, PCL 6, and PS unidrivers are limited to TCP/IP connections. EAC is used for autoconfiguration.
2- During installation,
Auto Configure
works, but is limited to TCP/IP connections. The
Update Now
feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 clients are connected to Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 hosts.
3- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Table 3: Bidirectional communication availability in Novell Netware environments
Method Connection type Novell
Netware 4.
x
Netware 5.
x
Installer Bindery
NDS
NDPS
MS Netware Client
1
Novell Netware Client
MS Netware Client
1
Novell Netware Client
MS Netware Client
1
Novell Netware Client x x x x x x x x
1- Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft
Client Service for NetWare.
26
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
The following tables show the availability of Enterprise Autoconfiguration for various operating systems and network environments that support bidirectional communication.
Table 4: Enterprise Autoconfiguration availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share
Method Connection type Microsoft Windows
95 98 Me NT
4.0
2000 XP 3
Microsoft Share
2000/XP host with
2000/XP client
NT 4.0
host with NT
4.0 client
Other
1
Installer Direct connect
USB (DOT4)
Parallel x x x x x x
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP
Standard TCP/IP
(HP)
TCP/IP x
IPX/SPX x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2
Add
Printer
(MS)
IPX/SPX
(HP) x
Direct connect
USB
Parallel
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP x
IPX/SPX x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 Standard TCP/IP
(HP)
TCP/IP
(MS)
IPX/SPX
(HP) x x x x x x x x x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2
1- This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations:
•
2000, XP, or 2003 host with NT 4.0, 95, 98, or Me client
•
NT 4.0 host with 2000, XP, 2003, 95, 98, or Me client
•
95, 98, or Me host with any client
2- In this environment, client machines use Point and Print to download the configured driver from the host.
3- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
27
Table 5: Enterprise Autoconfiguration availability in Novell Netware environments
Method Connection type
Netware 4.
x
Bindery queue
Novell
Netware 5.
x
NDS queue Bindery queue
NT 4.0
Installer Direct connect
Network
USB
Parallel
Jetdirect x x x x
Standard
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP (HP)
TCP/IP
(MS
(HP)
2
)
IPX/SPX
1- Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft
Client Service for NetWare.
The following tables provide information about the availability of Printer Status and Alerts in various operating systems and network environments.
Table 6: Printer Status and Alerts availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share
Method Connection type
95
1
Microsoft Windows
98 Me NT 4.0 2000 XP 4
Microsoft Share
9
x
/NT 4.0
host
2
2000/XP host
2, 4
Installer Direct connect
USB (DOT4)
Parallel x x x x x x
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP x
IPX/SPX x
Standard TCP/IP
(HP)
TCP/IP
(MS)
IPX/SPX
(HP) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
3 x x x x x x
3 x x x x x
1- For Windows 95, the Microsoft Winsock 2 patch must first be installed. To download the patch, go to:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows95/downloads/contents/WUAdminTools/S_WUNetworkingTools/
W95Sockets2/Default.asp
2- When using Microsoft Share, Printer Status and Alerts must be installed on both the host and the client machines.
3- Printer Status and Alerts is not supported with direct-connect shares.
4- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
28
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Table 7: Printer Status and Alerts availability in Novell Netware environments
Method
Installer Network
Connection type
Jetdirect
Standard
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP
(HP)
TCP/IP
(MS
(HP)
1
)
IPX/SPX x x
Bindery queue
x x
Netware 4.
x
Novell
Netware 5.
x
NDS queue Bindery NDS queue
x x x x x
queue
x x x x x x x
1- Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft
Client Service for NetWare.
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows and the PS drivers for Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 feature bidirectional communication technology which, in supported environments, provides automatic discovery and driver configuration for printer accessories at the time of installation.
Some accessories the Driver Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).
If the environment supports bidirectional communication, the installer presents Driver Autoconfiguration as an installable component by default for a Typical Installation and for a Custom Installation. The Driver Autoconfiguration component installs the bidirectional communication software. If the installation environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Driver Autoconfiguration option does not appear during installation. However, installed drivers are configured automatically in accordance with the HP printer bundle that is selected during installation of the printing-system software, except in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Note
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
For Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, Driver Autoconfiguration works in the following ways:
• In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the printer during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly.
The bidirectional communication software that is necessary for the preceding method of Driver Autoconfiguration is included in a Typical Installation and a Custom Installation when installing a network printer in supported environments.
•
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration functionality for an Add Printer wizard installation over a network. An Add Printer wizard installation that includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the device. Configuration occurs without user interaction. If bidirectional communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the
Add Printer Wizard uses the pre-existing bidirectional communication software to configure the printer driver. If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs the bidirectional communication software. EAC communicates with the printer and automatically matches the printer driver with the actual printer configuration. EAC is activated only once to use the autoconfiguration utility, and is then shut off. The files required to install EAC remain on your system.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
29
Note
When you use the Add Printer wizard to install drivers, you must select the HP LaserJet model that corresponds to your printer. The Add Printer wizard installs the driver using the correct settings for the model without communicating with the printer. If you do not select the model that corresponds to your printer, the driver settings do not match the actual printer.
•
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more information, see the
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
, which is available at:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj9500
Note
Windows 9.x, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0
For Windows 9.
x
, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0, Driver Autoconfiguration works in the following ways:
• In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the printer during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly.
•
If the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer changes after installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication. For example, if the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn is installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is added later, you can automatically configure the acessory in the driver by clicking the
Update Now
button on the driver's
Configuration
tab. The
Update Now
button activates the HP Network Registry Agent (HPNRA) and triggers the driver to recheck the registry for new information. The HPNRA automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears on the
Configuration
tab in the
Printer
folder.
The bidirectional communication software that is necessary for the two preceding methods of Driver
Autoconfiguration is included in a Typical Installation and a Custom Installation when installing a network printer in supported environments.
•
In environments that do not support bidirectional communication, the driver automatically configures options based on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer model that is selected during the installation of the printing-system software. Configuration is based solely on the definition of the printer model. See the following table, Driver
Autoconfiguration Defaults, for more information.
•
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration functionality for an Add Printer wizard installation over a network. An Add Printer wizard installation that includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the device. Configuration occurs without user interaction. If bidirectional communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the
Add Printer Wizard uses the pre-existing bidirectional communication software to configure the printer driver. If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs the bidirectional communication software. EAC communicates with the printer and automatically matches the printer driver with the actual printer configuration. EAC is activated only once to use the autoconfiguration utility, and is then shut off. The files required to install EAC remain on your system.
• HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more information, see the
HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide
, which is available at:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj9500
The following table lists the Driver Autoconfiguration defaults for Windows operating systems.
30
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Table 8: Driver Autoconfiguration defaults in Windows operating systems
Operating System Configuration Method Installation method
Add Printer Wizard r l e l a t s
I n
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000 unidriver
Windows 2000 traditional
Windows XP unidriver
5
Windows XP traditional
4
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
EAC
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
EAC
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
EAC
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
EAC
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
EAC
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
EAC
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
EAC
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
EAC
Y
1
N
N
Y
1
N
N
Y
1
N
Y
1
N
N
Y
1
N
N
Y
1
N
N
N
N
N
Y
1
Parallel
N
Y
1
N
USB
Y
N
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Y
Y
N
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Y
2
N
Y
1
Network Network
N
Y
1
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Y
1- HP Preconfiguration should always work. HP Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the printer the user is installing to if the printer matches the current HP Preconfiguration file (for example, duplexer on, no trays, manual duplex on, memory 48 MB, job storage off, mopy off) or if the administrator has modified the configuration file and the configuration file matches the printer being installed to.
2- Supported only if the Windows 95 system has both Microsoft Distributed Component Object Model (DCOM) and the
Winsock2 patch installed.
3- Technically, Windows 95 supports USB. However, the HP Color LaserJet 9500 does not support USB on Windows
95.
4- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
31
The following table lists the drivers that support EAC in Windows operating systems.
Table 9: Drivers that support Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Product Windows 95, 98, Me Windows NT 4.0
HP LaserJet 2300 Yes
HP Color LaserJet 2500 Yes
HP LaserJet 4100 and
4100mfp
HP LaserJet 4200 and
4300
No
Yes
HP Color LaserJet 4550 No
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Yes
HP LaserJet 5100 No
HP Color LaserJet 5500 Yes
HP Color LaserJet 8150 No
HP LaserJet 9000mfp No
HP Color LaserJet 9500
Yes
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows 2000, XP
Yes
Yes
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1- EAC is supported in the Windows 95 operating system only when both DCOM and the Microsoft Winsock2 patch are installed. For information about DCOM, go to:
http://www.microsoft.com/com/tech.dcom.asp
To download the Microsoft Winsock2 patch, go to:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows95/downloads/contents/WUAdminTools/S_WUNetworkingTools/
W95Sockets2/Default.asp
2- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
HP Embedded Web Server
The HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) is a standard feature for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer.
The HP Embedded Web Server provides a simple, easy-to-use solution for one-to-one printer management. In offices that have a limited number of printers, remote management of printing devices can be accomplished without installing any management software, such as HP Web JetAdmin. The only requirement is that the management console have a supported Web browser.
In environments with a larger number of printers, where one-to-one management is impractical, the HP Embedded
Web Server and HP Web JetAdmin work together to provide scalable remote printer management. Use HP Web
JetAdmin for consolidated management tasks, when you want to perform operations on a selected set of printers instead of on individual printers. For such environments, HP provides hooks between the HP Embedded Web Server and HP Web JetAdmin so that you can configure HP Embedded Web Server features on multiple printers in one operation. For example, you can set the security password for the HP Embedded Web Server on a population of printers simultaneously.
For additional information and a copy of the
HP Embedded Web Server User Guide
, go to:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj9500
To view information about the printer by using the HP Embedded Web Server, open a supported Web browser and type in the printer transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) address or host name. To find the TCP/IP address, look for "IP Address" on the enhanced input/output (EIO) Jetdirect page, in the "TCP/IP" section under
"Protocol Information". To find the host name of the printer, look for "Host Name" in the "TCP/IP" section.
You also can view information about an installed HP Jetdirect print server by clicking the
Networking
tab in the HP
Embedded Web Server window.
To print a copy of the EIO Jetdirect page from the printer control panel display, follow these steps:
1. Press the select button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press the select button.
32
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
3. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4. Press the select button to print the configuration page.
5. Look in the configuration page section marked "Printer Information" for the firmware date code. The firmware date code looks something like this: 20030502 05.003.0
Information tab
The HP Embedded Web Server offers the following additional features. To view the information, click the items on the menu that is on the left side of the HP Embedded Web Server
Information
tab:
•
Device Status
. This page provides current status information about your printer.
•
Configuration Page
. This page provides information about the configuration of your printer.
•
Supplies Status
. This page provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages printed, and the serial number of the printer.
•
Event Log
. This page provides information about reported printer errors.
•
Device Information
. This page shows device information, such as the printer TCP/IP address and serial number.
•
Control Panel
. This page shows the layout of the control panel.
Device status
If a printer problem exists, status information (such as whether the printer is online or the toner is low) is available through your Web browser on a computer that is linked directly to the printer. You can view this information without physically going to the printer to identify the status. The following illustration shows how this information is presented on the printer Web page.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
33
Figure 1: Device Status page
Configuration information
You can gain access to the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer configuration page remotely through the HP Embedded
Web Server. The HP Embedded Web Server configuration page provides configuration information about the printer in the same way as the configuration page printed from the printer. The following illustration shows an example of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP Embedded Web Server.
34
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 2: Configuration page
Note
The difference between the Total Memory setting and the DIMM Slot 1 memory value is reserved for system use.
Links to off-printer solutions
Links within the home page of the HP Web Server provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks.
•
hp instant support
. This link connects you to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for your device. Specific status and configuration information about the printer is retained and directed to the "Solve a Problem" Web site. This site offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems as quickly as possible.
•
Order Supplies
. This link connects to an ordering page where you can order genuine HP supplies, such as print cartridges and paper.
•
Product Support
. This link connects to an HP product support page from which you can search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for your printer.
Settings tab
The options on the left side of the
Settings
tab are as follows:
•
Configure Device
•
Email Server
•
Alerts
•
AutoSend
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
35
•
Security
•
Edit Other Links
•
Device Information
•
Language
•
Time Services
Remote printer configuration
You can obtain printer configuration information through a Web browser by opening the printer HP Embedded Web
Server page and changing any of the basic configuration information on the
Settings
tab. Security and password controls give management information system managers the level of control that they require within their environments. The following illustration shows an example of printer options that can be configured remotely.
Some configuration tasks cannot be performed remotely because you must examine printed pages.
Figure 3: Configure Device
36
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Networking tab
The following illustration shows the
Network Settings
option on the HP Embedded Web Server
Networking
tab.
Figure 4: Networking tab
The menu on the left side of the screen contains other networking options under three categories: configuration, security, and diagnostics. For more information, see the
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
.
Configuration
•
Network Settings
• Other Settings
• Support Info
• Select Language
Security
•
Admin Password
•
SSL/TLS
•
Simple Network Management Protocol, version 3 (SNMPv3)
•
Telnet
•
Access Control
Diagnostics
•
Network Statistics
•
Protocol Info
•
Configuration Page
•
Refresh Rate
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
37
Network settings
From the
Networking
tab, you can enable and configure the following network protocols:
•
TCP/IP
•
IPX/SPX
•
AppleTalk
•
Data link control/logical link control (DLC/LLC)
•
Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
Configurable e-mail alerts
The printer can automatically send e-mail alerts about printer problems or job status to specified e-mail addresses. For example, if toner is low, the printer can notify the person who is responsible for ordering or changing the cartridge. If a printer failure occurs, the printer can send an e-mail alert directly to the person who is responsible for fixing the problem. These e-mail alerts can be configured to be sent to any device that can accept e-mail, such as digital phones, pagers, and personal digital assistants (PDAs). In large environments, administrators can route e-mail addresses to list-servers or URLs for expanded notification.
Figure 5: Configurable Alerts page
38
E-mail command and response
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer can send e-mail messages directly. However, you must configure the email information to initiate this feature. One use for this feature is to send diagnostic information to solve a printer problem. An e-mail sent to the printer requests configuration information. The printer automatically sends that information back to the service provider. In many cases, the service provider can quickly identify the problem and solve the problem remotely. For more information about e-mail command and response, see the
HP Embedded Web
Server for HP LaserJet Printers
guide.
To configure your printer to send e-mails, follow these steps:
1. Take note of your printer's TCP/IP address on the EIO X Jetdirect page (this is the second page of the
Configuration Page printout. The number indicated by "X" can vary. To print a configuration page, see
"Determining the current level of firmware".
2. Launch your Web browser.
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
3. In the
Address:
or
Go to:
field, type the TCP/IP address that is assigned to the printer (for example,
192.168.0.20) or the host name (for example, http://myprinter). The HP Embedded Web Server home page appears.
4. From the top of the HP Embedded Web Server screen, click
Device
.
5. On the navigational bar on the left, click
Alerts
.
6. Under Notification Recipients, type your e-mail address (for example, [email protected]).
7. Click
Apply
.
8. Under
Select Events
, click
Media Path
.
9. Select the
List1
check box next to CLOSE DRAWERS/DOORS/COVERS.
10. Click
Apply
. A screen stating that your selections have been accepted should appear. Click
OK
.
11. In the
SMTP Server:
field under Outgoing Mail, type the TCP/IP address for the SMTP server (for example,
192.168.0.201).
12. In the
Domain Name:
field under
Outgoing Mail
, type the domain name.
13. Click
Apply
.
14. Click
Security
.
15. Under
Security
, select the
Outgoing Mail
check box.
16. Click
Apply
.
17. To test the configuration, open the top cover of the printer, and then go to your computer and verify that you have received an e-mail message from the printer.
Printer Status and Alerts
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software includes a utility called Printer Status and Alerts that you can use to monitor print jobs and printer status from the desktop. The Printer Status and Alerts feature provides printer and job status information such as printing history, job progress, toner and paper levels, and consumables and supplies reordering information, and presents a simulated view of the printer control panel. This utility offers several options for configuring pop-up windows to view the status of the printer and of individual print jobs.
Printer Status and Alerts is a selectable component of Custom Installation. To install Printer Status and Alerts, select
Custom Installation
, and then select the
Printer Status and Alerts
check box.
Printer Status and Alerts features are available for printers that have a connection that supports bidirectional functionality, whether directly or over a network. The Printer Status and Alerts feature cannot be installed over infrared
(IR) or serial ports. See "Bidirectional communication."
For Windows 95, the Microsoft Winsock2 patch must first be installed. To download the Microsoft Winsock2 patch, go to:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows95/downloads/contents/WUAdminTools/S_WUNetworkingTools/
W95Sockets2/Default.asp
HP Printer Status and Alerts communicates with the printer only during an active print job, which minimizes network traffic.
The following restrictions apply to HP products that use Printer Status and Alerts:
•
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 do not support Printer Status and
Alerts with terminal servers.
•
For Device Status (printer icons in the status window), your computer must have Internet Explorer version 4.72.
x
or later installed. To find the version number, open Internet Explorer, click
Help
, and then click
About Internet
Explorer
. Internet Explorer is not necessary for getting status about jobs. You can install Internet Explorer after installing Printer Status and Alerts.
•
Netscape browsers do not support HP Printer Status and Alerts.
•
On a few programs, such as Microsoft Excel and Seagate Crystal Reports, multiple copies of the same document show up in the Printer Status and Alerts window as separate jobs. This is because these programs actually send each copy as a separate job.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
39
•
For Windows screen-reader programs, such as Job Access With Speech from Freedom Scientific, your computer must have Internet Explorer version 5.0 or later installed. To find the version number, open Internet Explorer and click
Help
, and then click
About Internet Explorer
. Version 5.0 is reported as Version 5.00.
x
or later. Internet
Explorer is not necessary for getting status about jobs for network-connected printers. You can install Internet
Explorer after installing Printer Status and Alerts.
•
When a driver is renamed, job and device status are not tracked until the computer is restarted.
•
Drivers that are added after Printer Status and Alerts is installed are not recognized until the computer is restarted.
•
Clicking the
Cancel
button in the Printer Status and Alerts window does not always cancel a print job. This button sends a cancel request to the printer, but if the job has already been processed, it might not be possible to cancel the print job. (This is commonly the case with smaller print jobs.)
When using Printer Status and Alerts with Microsoft printer sharing, the following items apply:
•
The Microsoft patch "Vredir" is required if you want to use Printer Status and Alerts on a Windows 98 or Windows
Me computer for a printer that has been shared directly from a computer with Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 installed. Failure to install the patch could cause an intermittent blue screen to appear on the client computer. For Windows 95 operating systems, you must load DSCLIENT.EXE, copy VREDIR.VXD into the system folder, and restart your computer.
•
For Microsoft shared printers, the host system must have either
Printer Status and Alerts
or the
HP Driver
Autoconfiguration
option from the HP installer on the computer. Load Printer Status and Alerts on the computer that shares the printer before loading Printer Status and Alerts on the client computer.
•
For Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows Me client computers that have Printer Status and Alerts installed, installing a printer by using the Point and Print method does not activate Printer Status and Alerts.
When the Printer Status and Alerts feature is installed, a status icon in the form of a printer is included in the Windows system tray in the lower-right corner of the screen, in the Systray. The printer icon remains unchanged until you send a print job to the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer. When you send a print job, the icon changes to alert you to the status of the print job. Eight icons exist in this feature. The eight icons in the following illustration show current job status. Neither the
Receiving
nor the
Waiting
icon ever shows up in the Systray. When the print job is in a receiving or waiting state, the
Printing
icon appears in the Systray.
The icons behave differently, depending on whether the printer is connected through a direct connection (USB or parallel) or through a network.
Figure 6: Printer Status and Alerts icons
40
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Double-click the status icon to open the Printer Status and Alerts window, shown in the following illustration.
Figure 7: Printer Status and Alerts window
Note
The appearance on the screen varies according to the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer and its configuration.
The Printer Status and Alerts window consists of two panes. The left pane shows icons for the available printers, an icon for each current print job in progress, and an
Options
icon. The right pane provides information based on what is selected in the left pane. The buttons at the top can be used to perform the following functions:
•
Left arrow
: Return to the previous pane.
•
Right arrow
: Go to the next pane.
•
Circular arrows
: Refresh the pane.
•
Home
: Return to the device status.
•
Clock face
: Show print-job history.
Click a printer icon in the left pane to view information about the printer and supplies or to view a history of recent print jobs. The following printer information is available:
•
Device Status
indicates the current status of the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer.
•
Supplies
shows information about the percentage of print-cartridge life remaining.
•
Media
provides information about paper-handling devices and the status of each device. For example, this section of the window shows the level of media in each input device, as well as the status of output devices. This section also provides information about the type and size of media in each input device.
•
Capabilities
provides information about such things as installed trays, paper-handling devices, and disk storage.
Also listed are DIMM slots, the printer serial number, and the firmware date code. Click a print job icon to see information about the progress and status of the print job. Click the
Options
icon to select options for configuring pop-up status windows that contain document alerts and to set the refresh rate for showing printer status information.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
41
Figure 8: Refresh rate option
Note
The appearance of the screen varies according to the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer and its configuration.
Six settings are available for the refresh rate. The default setting is halfway between
Less Often
and
More Often
, as shown.
The
Less Often
setting specifies the least frequent update intervals, which have minimal impact on network traffic.
The
More Often
setting updates the status more frequently, but also has the most impact on traffic. The
Never
setting disables the job-status monitoring mechanism for the selected printer. If the refresh rate for a given printer is set to
Never
, then subsequent jobs sent to that printer do not appear in the Printer Status and Alerts window. If the
Never
setting is selected when the scope control is set to
All Printers,
then all job-status monitoring is disabled. However, even when job-status monitoring is disabled, you can open the status window and view the printer status panels.
Changes to the refresh rate settings affect any subsequent jobs that are submitted to the affected printer. Existing jobs that are already being processed have a fixed refresh rate that was determined (according to the setting in the Refresh
Rate panel) when the job was submitted.
Refresh-rate intervals for direct-connect printers are as follows:
• Less Often setting: 5 minutes
• One setting to the right of Less Often: 2 minutes
• Two settings to the right of Less Often: 1 minute
• Three settings to the right of Less Often: 30 seconds
• More Often setting: 10 seconds
On network printers, the refresh-rate interval changes, depending on the stage of the print job.
The
Alerts
options panel has controls to determine when the Printer Status and Alerts window automatically appears for each printer that has an icon in the left pane. The drop-down menu provides a list of available printers for which to make the selection. An option for all printers is included as the default selection. Each of the three, four, or five available selections, depending on the printer connection type, causes the Printer Status and Alerts window to automatically appear when that alert condition arises.
42
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Printers that are involved with at least one active print job are queried for job status periodically according to the
Status Check Rate
setting. If an error or a warning condition is detected, the Printer Status and Alerts window automatically appears according to the
Alerts
options.
Depending on the options you select, information in the status window changes for each job printed, each job completed, and each warning condition detected.
Figure 9: Printer Status and Alerts options
Note
The appearance of the screen varies according to the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer and its configuration.
Remote firmware update
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer features a remote firmware update capability. The method for downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest printing-system software and printer drivers.
The process for remotely upgrading printer firmware involves three steps:
1. Determine the current level of firmware installed on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer.
2. Go to the Web site and download the latest firmware to your computer.
3. Download the new firmware to the printer.
Determining the current level of firmware
To determine the current level of firmware, view the configuration page. To print a configuration page, press 22 on the printer control panel or follow these instructions.
1. On the printer control panel, press the SELECT button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press the select button.
3. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4. Press the select button to print the configuration page.
5. Look in the configuration page section marked
Printer Information
for the firmware date code. The firmware date code looks something like this: 20030502 05.003.0
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
43
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj9500_firmware
Note
Downloading the new firmware to the printer
The printer can receive an .RFU update to a printer as long as it is in a "ready" state. The printer waits for all of the input/output (I/O) channels to become idle before performing the update.
The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings return to default settings and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets, and Web access alerts.
Note
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the printer to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (Fast InfraRed Connect [FIR], parallel, or network). The reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the printer, such as the number of EIO devices installed, the presence of external paper-handling devices, and the amount of memory installed.
If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while UPGRADING PRINTER appears on the control panel display), the update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears (in English only) on the control panel display. The update must now be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the printer.
Finally, any print jobs ahead of the .RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is processed.
The printer automatically turns off and then on again after processing the update.
Use one of the following methods to update your printer.
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port
If the printer is connected through a local port (USB or parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to the printer by using a COPY command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS (R) window. At the command prompt, perform the following steps for your operating system.
Note
Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows Me
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type:
Mode lpt1:,,p
If the printer is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the proper LPT port number in the
mode
command.
2. Press
Enter
on the keyboard.The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3. At a command prompt, type:
4.
copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example:
C:\>copy/b c:\9500fw.rfu lpt1
44
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\9500fw.rfu" lpt1
5. Press
Enter
on the keyboard. The printer control panel displays the messages described in the section "Printer messages during firmware update". At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel displays the READY message .
6. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current upgrade.
7. Type
exit
at the command prompt to close the command window.
Note
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The .RFU file can be sent directly to the printer by typing a
copy
command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window.
1. At a command prompt, type:
copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example:
C:\>copy/b c:\9500fw.rfu lpt1
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\9500fw.rfu" lpt1
2. Press
Enter
on the keyboard. The printer control panel displays the messages described in the section "Printer messages during firmware update". At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel displays the READY message .
3. At the command prompt, type:
exit
to close the command window.
Note
Remote firmware update through a Windows network
If the printer is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions.
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type:
copy /B <FILENAME> \\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the printer is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the printer share name. For example:
C:\>copy /B c:\9500fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\9500fw.rfu" \\your_server\your_computer
2. Press
Enter
on the keyboard. The printer control panel displays the messages described in the section "Printer messages during firmware update". At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel displays the READY message . The message
1 file(s) copied
appears on the computer screen.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
45
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .RFU file to the printer is acceptable, including the following:
1. At the command prompt, type:
$cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/dev/parallel>
where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> contains the .RFU file.
Remote firmware update using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to update your HP LaserJet firmware. Complete the following steps for your operating system.
Note
Windows operating systems
1. Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see "Determining the current level of firmware".
Before connecting to the printer, make sure that the printer is not in PowerSave mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control panel display.
Note
2. Open a command window on your computer.
3. Type:
ftp <TCP/IP PRINTER ADDRESS>
For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type:
ftp 192.168.0.90
4. Press
Enter
on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for the user name, press
Enter
.
6. When prompted for the password, press
Enter
.
7. Type:
bin
at the command prompt.
8. Press
Enter
. The message
200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files
appears in the command window.
9. Type:
put <FILENAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type:
put C:\LJ\9500FW.RFU
and then press
Enter
.
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
put "c:\My Documents\LJ\9500fw.rfu"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
226 Transfer complete
Then, a message containing transfer speed information appears.
46
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
10. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the printer. This can take about five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the printer or computer.
The printer automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade.
11. At the command prompt, type:
bye
to exit the ftp command.
12. At the command prompt, type:
exit
to return to the Windows interface.
Note
Mac operating systems
1. Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see the "Determining the current level of firmware" section of this guide.
2. Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal application on the computer hard drive under the Applications/Utilities folder.
3. Type:
FTP <TCP/IP PRINTER ADDRESS>
For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type:
FTP 192.168.0.90
.
4. Press
Enter
on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for a user name and password, press
Enter
.
6. Type:
put <path>
where <path> is the location where the .RFU file was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type:
put /username/desktop/9500FW.RFU
and then press
Enter
.
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
put "/user name/desktop/9500FW.RFU"
Note
To ensure that the entire proper path to the .RFU file is placed in the
put
command, type
put
and a
space
and then drag and drop the .RFU file on to the terminal window. The complete path to the file will be placed after the
put
command automatically.
Note
7. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the printer. This can take about five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the printer or computer.
The printer automatically turns off and then turns on again to activate the update.
Note
Remote firmware update using FTP through a browser
Follow the instructions below to use FTP through a browser to update the printer firmware remotely.
The following instructions can be used on Windows or Mac operating systems.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
47
1. Open a browser window.
2. In the address line of the browser, type:
ftp://<IPADDRESS>
where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/IP address of your printer. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type:
FTP 192.168.0.90
3. Locate the .RFU file for the printer.
4. Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the
PORT1
icon in the browser window.
Remote firmware update using Fetch (Mac OS 8.6 and OS 9. x only)
For Mac OS 8.6 through 9.
x
OSs, a shareware program called Fetch provides FTP control for a
put
command.
Download and install the program from:
http://download.cnet.com/downloads/0-10207-100-5250613.html
Follow these instructions to use Fetch.
1. Start the program by clicking on the
Fetch
icon.
2. Type the IP address of the printer in the
Host:
box
3. Click the
Put Files
button and browse to the location of the .RFU file.
4. Double-click the file to select it and download it to the printer. A confirmation message appears in the main window.
5. Click
OK
.
Note
Remote firmware update using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 8.6 and OS 9. x only)
Follow these instructions to update the firmware using the HP LaserJet Utility.
1. The first step is to make sure you have the tools and files necessary for the update. You will need the
HP LaserJet Utility and the
9500fw.rfu
file, which is the firmware file for the printer.
The HP LaserJet Utility can be found on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software CD-ROM that came with the printer. If you do not have the software CD-ROM, you can obtain the HP LaserJet Utility by dowloading the latest printer installer from:
http://www.hp.com
The firmware file (
9500fw.rfu
) can be downloaded from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj9500_firmware
See the "Downloading the new firmware to the printer" section of this guide for more information.
Once you have the firmware file and the HP LaserJet Utility, you are ready to begin the upgrade process.
2. Launch the HP LaserJet Utility.
3. Click
Select Printer
and locate the printer you would like to upgrade on the network.
4. Select the printer on the right side of the dialog box, and click
OK
. An information dialog box for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer appears.
5. On the left side of the information dialog box, click
Files
. A dialog box appears that allows you to choose a file to be downloaded to the printer.
6. Click
Select File
.
7. Locate the
9500fw.rfu
file on your hard disk, and click the file name to highlight it. Then click
Select
. The
Files
dialog box updates showing the
9500fw.rfu
file under
File to download
.
8. Click
Download
.
The HP LaserJet Utility starts downloading the file to the printer. A progress bar keeps you updated on how much of the file has been downloaded. While the file is downloading, the RECEIVING UPGRADE message appears on the control-panel display on the printer. After the file has downloaded to the printer the PERFORMING UPGRADE message appears on the control-panel display.
The printer automatically turns off and then turns back on again after processing the upgrade.
48
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
9. After the printer has turned on again and finished initializing, print a configuration page to verify that the new firmware has been installed. Press 2, 2, on the printer control panel to print a configuration page. See the
"Determining the current level of firmware" section of this guide for more information.
Remote firmware update using the LPR command
Note
This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows
Server 2003.
Note
Follow the instructions below to update the printer software remotely using the LPR command.
1. From a command window, type:
lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l <FILENAME>
-OR-
lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>
where <IPADDRESS> can be either the TCP/IP address or the hostname of the printer, and where <FILENAME> is the filename of the .RFU file.
The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2. Press
Enter
on the keyboard. The printer control panel displays the messages described in the section "Printer messages during firmware update". At the end of the upgrade process, the printer control panel displays the
READY message.
3. Type:
exit
at the command prompt to close the command window.
Using HP Web JetAdmin to download the firmware to the printer
This procedure requires that you install HP Web JetAdmin version 7.0 or later on your computer. Complete the following steps to update a single printer through HP Web JetAdmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site.
1. Start HP Web JetAdmin.
2. Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the printer in the
Quick Device Find
field, and then click
Go
. The printer Status window appears.
3. Open the
Device Management
folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to the
Device Lists
folder.
4. Expand the
Device Lists
folder and select
All Devices
. Locate the printer you wish to update in the list of printers and click to select it.
5. Locate the drop-down box for
Device Tools
in the upper right corner of the window. Select
Update Printer
Firmware
from the
choose action
list.
6. If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the
All Available Images
box, click
Browse
in the
Upload New
Firmware Image
dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file you downloaded from the web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
7. Click
Upload
to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web JetAdmin server.
8. Refresh the browser.
9. Select the .RFU file from the
Printer Firmware Update
drop-down menu.
10. Click
Update Firmware
. HP Web JetAdmin sends the selected .RFU file to the printer. The printer control panel displays the messages described in the section "Printer messages during firmware update". At the end of the upgrade process, the printer control panel displays the READY message.
Also, HP Web JetAdmin 6.5 can be used to perform multiple or unattended installations.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
49
1. Start HP Web JetAdmin.
2. Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps: a. Click
Device Management
, then click
All Devices
.
b. Shift-click to select printers that you want to be included in the group, and then click
OK
.
c. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click
OK.
3. To modify several printers in a group, click the group name, and then click
Open
.
4. The drop-down menu for
Device Group Tools
appears in the right side of the window. Scroll if necessary to view it.
5. In the
Device Group Tools
drop-down box, choose an action. Type in the appropriate information, and click
Return to Device Group
when finished.
Printer messages during firmware update
The printer shows three messages that appear during a normal update process.
Table 10: Update messages
Printer message
RECEIVING UPGRADE
UPGRADING PRINTER
WAIT FOR PRINTER TO
REINITIALIZE
Explanation
This message appears from the time the printer recognizes the beginning of an
.RFU update until the time the printer has verified the validity and integrity of the
.RFU update.
This message appears while the printer is actually reprogramming the firmware.
This message appears from the time the printer has finished reprogramming the
DIMM until the printer reinitializes.
Note
To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the printer control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.
Troubleshooting a firmware update
The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.
Table 11: Troubleshooting a firmware update
Cause
The job was cancelled from the printer control panel.
No update has occurred.
Result
A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for example, the parallel cable was removed).
A power cycle occurred during RECEIVING
UPGRADE.
No update has occurred.
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during UPGRADING
PRINTER.
A power cycle occurred during WAIT FOR PRINTER
TO REINITIALIZE.
No update has occurred. Resend the update through a parallel port.
The update has been completed.
Print jobs sent to the printer while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.
The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective action required for each situation.
50
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Table 12: Troubleshooting a firmware update failure
Reason for firmware update failure
The .RFU file is corrupted.
The wrong printer model is contained in the .RFU file.
Corrective action
The printer recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update.
Download the file again and send the new file to the printer. Download the file from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj9500_firmware
The printer recognizes the model mismatch and rejects the update.
Download the correct file and send it to the printer. Download the file from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj9500_firmware
The upgrade was interrupted.
See the "Troubleshooting a firmware update" table.
A flash hardware failure occurred.
Although it is extremely unlikely, the device might have a hardware failure. Call technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the printer for a local telephone support list).
Note
All HP LaserJet printers leave the factory with the latest available firmware version installed. If a remote firmware update fails, the .RFU file must be sent over a parallel port connection.
Printing .PDF documents from a command line
Documents in Portable Document Format (PDF) can be printed by using a command line instead of the Adobe
Acrobat or Acrobat Reader programs.
Use one of the following methods to print PDF files to your printer.
Command-line printing using a local Windows port
Note
Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows Me
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type:
Mode lpt1:,,p
If the printer is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the proper LPT port number in the
mode
command.
Note
2. Press
Enter
on the keyboard.The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3. At a command prompt, type:
4.
copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .PDF file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type:
C:\>copy/b c:\9500fw.pdf lpt1
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\9500fw.pdf"
5. Press
Enter
on the keyboard. The message PROCESSSING JOB appears on the printer front panel, and the job prints.
6. At the command prompt, type:
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
51
exit
to close the command window.
Note
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The .PDF file can be sent directly to the printer by typing a
copy
command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window.
1. At a command prompt, type:
copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .PDF file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type:
C:\>copy/b c:\9500fw.pdf lpt1
2. Press
Enter
on the keyboard.
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\9500fw.pdf"
The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the printer control panel, and the job prints.
3. At the command prompt, type:
exit
to close the command window.
Note
Command-line printing using a Windows network
If the printer is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions.
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:
copy /B <FILENAME> \\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .PDF file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the printer is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the printer share name. For example:
C:\>copy /B c:\9500fw.pdf \\your_server\your_computer
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy/b /B "c:\My Documents\9500fw.pdf" \\your_server\your_computer
.
2. Press
Enter
on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the printer front panel, and the job prints.The message
1 file(s) copied
appears on the computer screen.
Command-line printing using UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .PDF file to the printer is acceptable, including the following:
1. At the command prompt, type:
$cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/dev/parallel>
where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> contains the .PDF file.
Command-line printing using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to print a
PDF document. Complete the following steps for the operating system.
52
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Windows operating systems
1. Open a command window on your computer.
2. Type:
ftp <TCP/IP PRINTER ADDRESS>
For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type:
ftp 192.168.0.90
3. Press
Enter
on the keyboard.
4. When prompted for the user name, press
Enter
.
5. When prompted for the password, press
Enter
.
6. Type:
bin
at the command prompt.
7. Press
Enter
. The message
200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files
appears in the command window.
8. Type:
put <FILENAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .PDF file to be printed, including the path. For example, type:
put C:\LJ\9500FW.PDF
and then press
Enter
.
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
put "c:\My Documents\LJ\9500fw.pdf"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
9. Your .PDF print job prints.
Mac operating systems
1. Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see the "Determining the current level of firmware" section of this guide.
2. Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal application on the computer hard drive under the Applications/Utilities folder.
3. Type:
FTP <TCP/IP PRINTER ADDRESS>
For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type:
FTP 192.168.0.90
.
4. Press
Enter
on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter.
6. Type:
put <path>
where <path> is the location where the .PDF file was downloaded from the Web. For example, type:
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
53
Note
Note put /username/desktop/9500FW.PDF
and then press Enter.
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
put "/user name/desktop/9500FW.PDF"
To ensure that the entire proper path to the .PDF file is placed in the
put
command, type
put
and a
space
and then click and drag the .PDF file on to the terminal window. The complete path to the file will be placed after the
put
command automatically.
7. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the printer. This can take about five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the printer or computer.
8. The printer automatically turns off and on again to activate the update.
Note
File printing using FTP through a browser
Follow the instructions below to use FTP through a browser to print from a command line.
The following instructions can be used on Windows or Mac operating systems.
1. Open a browser window.
2. In the address line of the browser, type:
ftp://<IPADDRESS>
For example, if the TCP/IP address of your printer is 192.168.0.90, type:
FTP 192.168.0.90
3. Locate the .PDF file for the printer.
4. Drag and drop the .PDF file onto the
PORT1
icon in the browser window.
File printing using Fetch (Mac OS 8.6 and OS 9. x only)
For Mac OS 8.6 through 9.
x
OSs, a shareware program called Fetch provides FTP control for a
Put
command.
Download and install the program from:
http://download.cnet.com/downloads/0-10207-100-5250613.html
Follow these instructions to use Fetch.
1. Start the program by clicking on the
Fetch
icon.
2. Enter the IP address of the printer in the
Host:
box
3. Click the
Put Files
button and browse to the location of the .PDF file.
4. Double-click the file to select it and download it to the printer. A confirmation message appears in the main window.
5. Click
OK
.
File printing using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 8.6 and OS 9. x only)
Follow these instructions to print a .PDF file using the HP LaserJet Utility.
1. The first step is to make sure you have the tools and files necessary for the update. You will need the
HP LaserJet Utility and the .PDF file that you want to print.
The HP LaserJet Utility can be found on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software CD-ROM that came with the printer. If you do not have the software CD-ROM, you can obtain the HP LaserJet Utility by downloading the latest printer installer from:
http://www.hp.com
54
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Once you have the HP LaserJet Utility and you know the location of the .PDF file you want to print, you are ready to begin the command-line printing process.
2. Launch the HP LaserJet Utility.
3. Click
Select Printer
and locate the printer you would like to upgrade on the network.
4. Select the printer on the right side of the dialog box, and click
OK
. An information dialog box for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer appears.
5. On the left side of the information dialog box, click
Files
. A dialog box appears that allows you to choose a file to be downloaded to the printer.
6. Click
Select File
.
7. On your hard disk, locate the .PDF file that you want to print, and click the file name to highlight it. Then click
Select
. The
Files
dialog box updates showing the .PDF file that you want to print under
File to download
.
8. Click
Download
.
The HP LaserJet Utility starts downloading the file to the printer. A progress bar keeps you updated on how much of the file has been downloaded. While the file is downloading, the PROCESSING JOB message appears on the control-panel display on the printer, and the the .PDF file prints.
Command-line printing using the LPR command
Note
This command-line printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows
Server 2003.
Note
Follow the instructions below to print a .PDF file remotely using the LPR command.
1. From a command window, type:
lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME
-OR-
lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>
where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the printer, and where FILENAME is the file name of the .PDF file.
The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2. The file prints, but no further messages appear in the command prompt window.
3. Type:
exit
at the command prompt to close the command window.
Euro character
The euro is the name for the currency of the European Union (EU). This unit was launched on January 1, 1999. The euro has changed the way business is conducted in Europe and has affected every company and industry in the world. It is vital that companies understand and prepare for the changes the euro brings.
This HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer includes euro characters for each of the internal fonts. The printer can print the euro character in the Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. HP is committed to maximizing document portability through supporting and promoting euro-symbol standards.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Euro character
55
Printing-system components
Printing system and installer
HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM for Windows systems
In previous versions of the printing-system software, the installer was started by locating and running the SETUP.EXE
file. For the Microsoft Windows environment (Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003), the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM provides an interactive software window that you can use not only to install the printer drivers and related components, but also to gain access to online product registration, user documentation, a customization utility, Adobe Acrobat Reader software, and optional HP software.
The following illustration shows the main screen of the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM, which appears when you insert the printing software CD-ROM in your CD-ROM drive. If the screen does not appear when you insert the CD-ROM, click
Start
, click
Run,
click
Browse...
, navigate to the root directory of the CD-ROM, and then doubleclick the SETUP.EXE file to start the CD-ROM.
Figure 10: Installation software CD-ROM main screen
Note
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM contains the following options. The text that follows each of the following options is approximately the same text that appears when you put the cursor on the option button.
The options on your printer might vary from the illustration.
install printer
- This wizard guides you through the installation of your HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software. You are given the choice of performing a Typical Installation or a Custom Installation. If you select Typical
Installation, only the necessary software is installed. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the components you want to install.
customization utility
- This utility can be used to create a custom software installer for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer that can then be copied to other media, such as a local hard drive or a network drive.
56
Printing-system components Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note register product
- This option can be used to register your HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer now and to receive the following information at no cost:
• notification of driver updates
• technical support updates
• news about emerging technologies
printer documentation
- This option can be used to view the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer documentation.
The following document options are available:
•
user guide
•
user reference guide
•
install notes
•
hp jetdirect guide
For systems that do not have Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, you are given the option to install that software. Clicking any of the links to documentation that is provided in the Adobe Acrobat PDF file format opens a dialog box from which you can install Adobe Acrobat Reader software from the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software
CD-ROM.
support
- To increase productivity and get the most use from your HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer, view a list of optional software available for installation and links to HP Web sites. The following options are available:
•
Click
HP web jetadmin
to download HP Web JetAdmin software from the Web for a Web browser-based networkprinter-management tool.
•
Click
color matching information
for information about how to make best use of the color functions of your
HP Color LaserJet 9500.
•
Click
supplies
for information about ordering HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printing supplies.
•
Click
product information
for HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer support information and updates.
•
Click
hp.com
to go to the HP home Web page for products and services, support, drivers, and HP online stores.
Installer features
The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the product line. The common installer is available for the Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
The common installer offers the following features:
•
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM features an interactive software interface. See the "HP Color
LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM for Windows systems" section of this guide.
•
Acrobat Reader is available.
•
The installer is Web-enabled, providing access to the HP Web site for the latest software components and drivers.
•
Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a network printer in a single process.
•
The selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language (for Windows 95, Windows
98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 only). You can use the installer to select any of the languages on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM.
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM also includes the following features:
• the HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility
• product registration, using the Web and e-mail
• the HP Customization Utility for custom installations
Software Technical Reference ENWW Printing-system components
57
All of the Windows system components are installed by using the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system installer.
The installer automatically senses your language of choice and your operating system. It offers selections for each printer model. You can select the type of installation you prefer: Typical Installation or Custom Installation.
When performing a Web installation, the installer compares the versions of the software components on the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM to those on the HP Web site. If newer versions are on the HP Web site, the installer downloads them.
Installable components
This section provides information about the various installable components that are available either with the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM or from the HP Web site.
Printer drivers
In some cases, older drivers can be used with new printers. Because earlier (legacy) HP LaserJet printers might have different versions of the PCL language, new drivers are not supported with legacy printers. The drivers associated with each printer use the version of PCL language that is installed in the printer.
The printing system for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer includes the following printer drivers.
Note
PCL 5c, PCL 6, and PS drivers
The following drivers are available for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer.
•
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
•
The HP traditional PS driver for Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
•
HP PCL 5c, PCL 6, and PS unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
All of the drivers provide access to the printer paper-handling and print-quality features, and are described in Chapter 3 of this guide.
If you select a Typical Installation during installation of the printing-system software, the PCL 6 driver is set as the default driver.
Windows 95, 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and Server 2003 driver versions
The PCL 6 and PCL 5c support for Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems is provided by using the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer drivers for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer. For Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server
2003, the HP Color LaserJet 9500 generic printer description (GPD) provides information about printer features for the
PCL 5c and the PCL 6 driver. The HP Color LaserJet 9500 PS printer description (PPD) provides PS feature support for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer.
If you are using an HP traditional driver, you can view the printer driver version number by clicking the HP logo in the lower-left corner of the following HP PCL 5c printer-driver tabs:
• Configure
• NT Forms
• Finishing
• Effects
• Paper
• Destination
• Basics
58
Printing-system components Software Technical Reference ENWW
If you are using an HP unidriver in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 environments, follow these steps to find driver version information:
1. Click
Start
.
2. Click
Settings
.
3. Click
Printers
(or
Printers and Faxes
in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003).
4. Right-click the printer icon.
5. Click
Properties
.
6. Click the
About
tab.
Macintosh and Macintosh-compatible system-driver versions
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing solution for Macintosh is composed of the Print Center for OS X and the Apple
LaserWriter for OS 8.6 and OS 9, which are provided with the operating system, and HP-created PPD files. The driver uses these files to determine the features and PS commands that the printer supports. Bidirectional support in
AppleTalk and USB connections supports autoconfiguration of the software. The installable components are:
• the HP LaserJet Installer for Mac OS 8.6, Mac OS 9, and Mac OS X.
• the HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer.
•
SYSTEM/EXTENSIONS/PRINTER DESCRIPTIONS (for Mac OS 8 and Mac OS 9).
•
LIBRARY/PRINTERS/PPDS/CONTENTS/RESOURCES/LANGUAGE.LPROJ (for Mac OS X).
• the HP LaserJet Utility, an HP printer utility that is installed in the HP LaserJet folder of Mac OS 8 and Mac OS 9.
The HP LaserJet Utility provides configuration and management support for PS .
• online Help, an HTML-based printer and utility help that can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS
Help Center (English only).
• install notes.
Additional driver availability
Additional drivers are available from your HP distributor or from the Web site.
These drivers are:
•
OS/2 PCL 5c, OS/2 PS, and OS/2 PCL 6 printer drivers. The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2.
•
UNIX model scripts. For further information about UNIX drivers, click
hp printer installation software
at:
http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing
•
Linux drivers. For further information about Linux drivers for HP LaserJet printers, go to:
http://www.hp.com/go/linux
Or visit the HP Linux support home page at:
http://hp.sourceforge.net
.
Additional productivity tools
HP Web Registration
You can use this component to register your HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer on the HP Web site or through email. After you have successfully installed the software, the installer prompts you to register your
HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer. Also, you can gain access to HP Web Registration from the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM by clicking
Register Product
. You can choose to complete the online registration at that time or later. If you want to register your printer later, click
Register Product
from the HP Color LaserJet 9500 program group when you decide to complete your registration.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Printing-system components
59
HP Web JetAdmin
Use HP Web JetAdmin to manage HP Jetdirect connected printers within your intranet by using a browser. HP Web
JetAdmin is a browser-based management tool and should be installed only on the network administrator's computer.
When it is installed on a host server, any client can use HP Web JetAdmin through a supported Web browser (such as
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0, or Netscape Navigator 7.0, by browsing to the HP Web JetAdmin host.
HP Web JetAdmin 7.0 and later versions have the following features:
• task-oriented user interface that provides configurable views for network managers
• customizable user profiles that can be customized to let network administrators include only the function that is being viewed or used
• routing of instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other printer problems to different people
• remote installation and management from anywhere by using only a standard Web browser
• advanced automatic discovery of peripherals on the network without manually typing information about each printer into a database
• simple integration into enterprise-management packages
• capacity to find peripherals based on parameters such as the Internet protocol (IP) address, color capability, and model name
• capacity to organize peripherals into logical groups, with an option that provides virtual office maps for easy navigation
HP Web JetAdmin can be used for access to the HP Embedded Web Server, ordering supplies, and remote firmware updates (for supported printers).
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM browser provides the following link to download the latest version of the HP Web JetAdmin software:
http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
Click
support
from the CD-ROM browser, and then click
hp web jetadmin
. The following table shows the supporting operating systems and hardware for HP Web JetAdmin.
Table 13: HP Web JetAdmin support
Protocols
•
TCP/IP
•
IPX/SPX
60
Printing-system components Software Technical Reference ENWW
Compatible operating systems
Supported products
Supported browsers
Supported printers
•
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, Server, and
Advanced Server
•
Microsoft Windows XP Professional with service pack 1 and Windows Server 2003
•
Microsoft Windows NT Server and Workstation with service pack 3 or later
•
Red Hat Linux 8.0
•
SuSE Linux v. 8.1
Shared print queue creation support
•
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, Server and
Advanced Server
•
Microsoft Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003
• Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Server and Workstation
• HP-UX 11.0
• Red Hat Linux 8.0
• Solaris 2.6, 7 and 8
• SuSE Linux v 8.1
• Novell NetWare 5.1 and 6.0 (IPX only) using
Netware Client 4.83 -- using HP Web JetAdmin only on a Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 system
All HP and non-HP printers connected through HP
Jetdirect print servers, and standard MIB-compliant third-party network connected printers.
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 (Windows only);
•
Netscape 7.0 (English) all operating systems
All HP and non-HP printers connected through HP
Jetdirect print servers, and standard MIB-compliant third-party network connected printers.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Printing-system components
61
62
Printing-system components Software Technical Reference ENWW
3
Printer driver features
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer drivers. The chapter contains the following major sections:
• HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features. This section describes the PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows
95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
•
The HP traditional PS driver features. This section describes the PS driver for Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows
Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
•
HP PCL 5c, PCL 6, and PS unidriver features. This section describes the PCL 5c, PCL 6, and PS drivers for
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
•
Structure and availability of the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software CD-ROM. This section describes the three printing-system software CD-ROMs that are included with the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer.
•
Driver feature comparison in Windows and Macintosh operating systems. The tables in this section provide an overview of printer driver features.
You can control print jobs from several places: the printer control panel, the software program, and the driver UI.
Generally, for features that are common to two or more of these places (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings made at the printer control panel are overridden by settings made from within a software program, and settings made from within a software program are overridden by settings made to driver properties through the driver UI.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
When you install the printer in Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows NT 4.0, the HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers are used.
This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver interfaces.
Access to drivers
To gain access to driver settings from within most software programs, click
File
, click
, and then click
Properties
.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs that appear vary, depending on the printer model and the driver.
You can also control the drivers directly from your computer. In Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows NT 4.0, and Windows 2000, click
Start
, click
Settings
, click
Printers
, right-click the printer name, and then click
Printing Preferences
or
Document Defaults
(depending on the OS and driver), to gain access to the same set of driver tabs that the software program controls.
If, after right-clicking the printer name, you click
Properties
, you gain access to a different set of tabs that control the driver and driver connections.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Introduction
63
Help system
The HP LaserJet 6 and PCL 5c drivers include a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
What's this? Help
What's this? Help is supported in Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
•
Right-click a control and click
What's this?
, and a pop-up Help window appears.
•
Click the
?
button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. Use this special cursor to select a control, and the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.
•
Press the
F1
key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
Press the
Help
button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, and context-sensitive Help appears.
Constraint messages
Constraint messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific actions you take. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the capabilities of the printer or the current settings of other controls. For example, if you click
Print on Both Sides
and then change the paper type to transparencies, a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict.
Figure 11: A typical constraint message with an OK button
Whenever a constraint message appears with the
OK
or
Cancel
button, the interpretation of the button is as follows:
•
Clicking
OK
accepts the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value.
•
Clicking
Cancel
rejects the change that was just made, and the control returns to its previous value.
64
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Bubble Help
Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase "i" in it, representing the international symbol for information. The following illustration shows Bubble Help icons on a driver tab.
Figure 12: A property page with Bubble Help icons
The bubble typically appears next to a disabled control, although it can also accompany an enabled control if there is an important note concerning its use. Moving the pointer over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area underneath the pointer is selectable. When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard, a message box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done to enable it. If the control is not disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution you should be aware of when using that particular feature.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
65
Finishing tab features
The following illustration shows the
Finishing
tab.
Figure 13: The default appearance of the Finishing tab
66
The options in the
Print Quality
group box might vary, depending on your HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer model. The
Finishing
tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets
group box
•
Document Options
group box
•
Document preview image
•
Print Quality
group box
Print Task Quick Sets
Print Task Quick Sets
is a setting that is available on all of the tabs except the
NT Forms
and
Configure
tabs and that is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all of the other tabs (except the
NT
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Forms
and
Configure
tabs).
Print Task Quick Sets
are either preset or user-defined printing specifications (such as paper size, pages per sheet, and so on).
The
Print Task Quick Sets
control is available on all of the
Document Defaults
or
Printing Preferences
driver tabs
(the
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Paper
,
Destination
,
Basics
, and
Color
tabs). The
Print Task Quick Sets
control does
not
appear on the driver
Properties
tabs (the
NT Forms
tab and the
Configure
tab).
The
Print Task Quick Sets
control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all other
Document Defaults
or
Printing Preferences
driver tabs.
The following settings are available in the
Print Task Quick Sets
drop-down menu.
•
Default Print Settings
•
Booklet on 11x17
•
Booklet on A3
•
Booklet on A4
•
Booklet on Letter
•
User Guide Print Settings
An illustration of the available
Print Task Quick Sets
appears below.
Figure 14: Print Task Quick Sets
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
67
Default Print Settings
When you select
Default Print Settings
, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom paper sizes, or the
User Guide Print Settings
quick set have been changed or deleted, the original settings are not restored.
Type a new Quick Set name here
appears in the
Print Task Quick Sets
menu automatically if no other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings match the original settings.
Otherwise, the setting in the
Print Task Quick Sets
menu is the same label that appeared when you last closed the printing
Properties
dialog box by clicking
OK
.
The following table shows the default settings for
Print Task Quick Sets
. See the "HP Driver Preconfiguration" section of this document for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
Table 14: Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer
Driver feature
Print on both sides
Flip pages up
Booklet printing
Pages per sheet
Print page border
Page order
Print quality
Current setting
Off
Off
Off
1
U.S. English Print Task
Quick Sets default values
Off
Right, then down
Best quality
PCL 6: This is the "Faster
Printing" setting
Other language default setting (if different)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Preconfigurable
1
PCL 5c: This is the "Best
Quality" setting
Automatic No Rendering mode (PCL 5c only)
Scale patterns
(WYSIWYG)
Print text as black
TrueType as bitmaps
Print document on
Size to print on
On
Off
Off - send TrueType fonts as outlines
Off - print on the size specified in the
Paper
tab
Letter
On (in Thai only)
Default value depends on regional paper size
Yes
Yes
Yes (except in Thai)
Yes
Yes
Scale to fit
% of normal size
Watermarks
Watermarks first page only
Current watermarks
Watermark message
Off
100
(none)
Off
(none), Confidential,
Draft, SAMPLE
(none)
Diagonal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Yes
2
Yes
2 Watermark message angle
Watermark message custom angle
Watermark font name
Watermark font color
52
Arial (R)
Gray
Language dependent
Yes
Yes
2
Yes
2
68
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Driver feature U.S. English Print Task
Quick Sets default
Watermark font shading Very Light
values
Watermark font size
Watermark font style
140
Regular
Mini pages tab
Use different paper for first page
All pages and first page size is
All pages and first page source is
All pages and first page
All pages
Off - all of the pages use the same paper
Letter
Auto Select
Unspecified type is
Other pages source is
Other pages type is
Back cover
Back cover source is
Back cover type is
Auto Select
Unspecified
No back cover
Auto Select
Unspecified
Custom paper size width 8.50 inches
Custom paper size height 11.0 inches
Paper size units
Destination features
Job storage mode
Job storage require PIN to print
Job storage user name
Inches
Job Storage
Off
Off
Job storage job name
Job storage PIN to print
Output bin
Output bin option
Copies
Orientation
Rotate by 180 degrees
User logon name <blank user must enter>
<blank - user must enter>
0000
Top bin (face-down)
(none)
1
Portrait
Off
Other language default setting (if different)
Default value depends on regional paper size
210 mm
297 mm
Millimeters
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
2
Preconfigurable
1- Preconfigurable by using an HP Preconfiguration tool. For more information, go to:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj9500
2- Not supported in Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows Me
1
User Guide Print Settings
The
User Guide Print Settings
option provides a
Print Task Quick Set
for optimal printing of the
User Reference
Guide
for the HP Color LaserJet 9500.
Type new Quick Set name here
By default, the
Print Task Quick Set
menu is set to
Type new Quick Set name here
. When you change any of the default settings on any of the
Document Defaults
driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a
Print Task
Quick Set
, highlight the word
Type new Quick Set name here
, type the name you want for your new
Print Task
Quick Set
, and click
Save
.
Print Task Quick Sets
are saved in the system registry. To delete a
Print Task Quick
Set
, select it from the drop-down menu and click
Delete
.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
69
You can store a maximum of 25 user-defined
Print Task Quick Sets
on a particular system. If you attempt to save too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined. Please delete some before adding new ones."
Document Options
The
Document Options
group box contains the following controls.
•
Print on Both Sides
check box
•
Flip Pages Up
option
•
Booklet Printing
drop-down menu
•
Staple
check box and stapling options
•
Pages Per Sheet
spin box
•
Print Page Borders
check box
•
Page Order
drop-down menu
Note
Print on Both Sides check box
The
Print on Both Sides
check box is available only if the printer has a duplexing unit installed. The
HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn comes with a duplexing unit already installed. The duplexing unit is an optional accessory for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n.
In addition to having a duplexing unit installed, the duplexing unit must be correctly configured in the printer driver in order to use the
Print on Both Sides
option. To configure the duplexing unit, click
Start
on the Windows task bar, click
Settings
, and then click
Printers
. Right-click on the printer name, and then click
Properties
. Click the
Configure
tab, and click the
duplexing unit
check box to select it. Then click
Apply
, and close the driver window.
The default setting for the
Print on Both Sides
option is off (not selected).
Print on Both Sides
is available when the following conditions exist:
•
Type is
on the
Paper tab
is set to any type except for
Envelope
,
Labels
, or
Transparency
.
•
Size is
is Letter, Legal, A3, A4, A5, B4 (Japanese Industry Standard, or JIS), B5 (JIS), Executive, Executive (JIS),
8.5x13 (Custom), 12x18 (Custom), 8K, 16K, or custom sizes greater than or equal to 98 mm by 191 mm (3.86
inches x 7.5 inches) and less than or equal to 306 mm by 469 mm (12.0 inches x 18.5 inches).
When
Paper Size
is set to Letter, Legal, A4, or B4 (JIS), clicking
Print on Both Sides
makes the
Flip Pages Up
and
Booklet Printing
options available.
Automatically printing on both sides
Use the duplexing unit in the printer to automatically print on two sides of the paper when that option is specified in the job . The HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn comes with a duplexing unit installed. The duplexing unit is an optional accessory for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of printer settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.
70
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Flip Pages Up
The
Flip Pages Up
check box, enabled only when
Print on Both Sides
is selected, is used to specify the duplexbinding option. By default, the
Flip Pages Up
check box is not selected. The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the paper orientation selected on the
Basics
tab.
Table 15: Page orientation
Orientation (Basics tab)
Portrait
Landscape
Flip Pages Up selected
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Flip Pages Up not selected
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When
Print on Both Sides
is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
Booklet printing
The
Booklet Printing
drop-down menu, visible when
Print on Both Sides
is selected, offers choices that are based on the current paper size. The default setting for the
Booklet Printing
drop-down menu is
Off
. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the paper size set on the
Paper
tab.
•
[paper size] (Left Binding)
•
[paper size] (Right Binding)
When you select
[paper size] (Left Binding)
or
[paper size] (Right Binding)
, the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding, and, if the
Pages per Sheet
setting is on the default setting of 1, it automatically changes to 2. You may change the
Pages per Sheet
setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16. See "Pages per Sheet" in the
"HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features" section of this document for more information.
Booklet printing is enabled only when Letter, Legal, 11x17, or B4 (JIS) is selected as the paper size. Booklet printing is disabled when other paper sizes are selected, including envelopes and postcards of any size.
The
Booklet Printing
drop-down menu appears only when:
•
Print on Both Sides
is selected.
•
% of Normal Size
(on the
Effects
tab) is 100.
•
Pages per Sheet
is 1.
•
Print Document On
<media type> (on the
Effects
tab) is not selected.
If any of these conditions is not met (except the first), a Bubble Help appears next to
Booklet Printing
to tell you why it is disabled.
Book and booklet printing
Book and booklet printing are both supported by the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer.
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type for the first page (front cover) or last page (back cover). Use the
First Page
and
Back Cover
minitabs on the
Paper
tab (available when you select the
Use different paper for first page
check box) to select different media for the first and last pages.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type. Use the
Booklet Printing
drop-down menu on the
Finishing
tab to control booklet settings.
Printing a Booklet
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet and that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type. Follow the instructions below for printing a booklet.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
71
Note
The following instructions apply only to the HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers. The HP traditional PS driver supports booklet printing through Windows programs that provide booklet-printing configuration settings.
1. Click
File
, click
, and then click
Properties
.
2. Click the
Finishing
tab. On the drop-down menu, select
Print on Both Sides
.
3. In the
Booklet Printing
drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example,
Letter [Left binding]
).
Figure 15: Printing a booklet
72
Printing a book
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type for the first page (front cover) or last page (back cover). The book cover must be the same size as the inside sheets. Follow these instructions for book printing.
1. Click
File
, click
, and then click
Properties
.
2. Click the
Paper
tab, and then select the
Use different paper for first page
check box.
3. Click the
First Page
tab. On the
Size is
,
Source is
, and
Type is
menus, select the size, source, and type settings for your cover.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
4. Click the
Other Pages
tab. On the
Size is
and
Source is
menus, select the size and source settings for the inside sheets of your print job.
5. Click the
Back Cover
tab. The back cover, if there is one, must be the same size as the booklet cover and the inside sheets. The
No back cover
is the default setting. If your print job has a back cover that uses the same source and type settings you selected in the
First Page
tab, select
Use the first page source
. If not, select
Use an alternate source
, and then select the back-cover settings in the
Source is
and
Type is
menus.
Whenever you make changes to all of the pages (that is, when
Use different paper
is cleared), these changes are reflected in both the
First Page
and
Other Pages
settings whenever you set
Use different paper
.
The
Back Cover
tab is not available when you select any
Booklet Printing
setting except
Off
(which is the default). When you use this feature, the last page of the print job is folded into the middle of the booklet.
Staple check box
Note
The
Staple
check box, the
Stapling
button, and the
Fold/Saddle Stitch
check box are available only if you have an Accessory Output Bin with a stapling device installed on the printer and configured in the driver. The
HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn comes standard with either an HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker or an
HP Multifunction Finisher installed. Accessory Output Bins are not available for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n.
To configure the Accessory Output Bin in the driver, click
Start
, click
Settings
, click
Printers
, right-click on the printer name, and then click
Properties
. Click the
Configure
tab, select your output device from the drop-down menu, and then click
OK
.
Click the
Staple
check box if you want to use any of the stapling options for the HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker or the
HP Multifunction Finisher.
Stapling Options dialog box
Click the
Stapling
button to open the
Stapling Options
dialog box. Use these settings to select the stapling options you want to apply to your document. The stapling options are only available when the Accessory Output Bin installed on your printer has a stapler (for example, the HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker or the HP Multifunction Finisher). The specific stapling options available depend on which Accessory Output Bin is installed.
The following illustration shows the
Stapling Options
dialog box for the HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker.
Figure 16: Stapling Options dialog box for HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
The following
Stapling Options
are available.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
73
74
•
None
(default)
•
One Staple
•
One Staple Angled
(HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker only)
•
Two Staples
•
Three Staples
(HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker only)
•
Six Staples
(HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker only)
•
Fold/saddle stitch
(HP Multifunction Finisher only)
Use the following guidelines when stapling.
•
Each stapler has a maximum number of pages that can be stapled. Consult your stapler documentation to find out your stapler limitations.
•
One Staple Angled
does not work with some paper sizes; in these cases,
One Staple
is used.
•
If you have selected more than one staple per page and you are printing on both sides, you cannot flip your pages up, or to the left or right, depending on which edge of the paper the staples are placed.
•
When selecting a stapling option, pages are always printed to the
Stapler Bin
on the printer.
•
For some paper sizes, the printer might assume a specific paper feed orientation (that is, which edge goes into the printer first). If you encounter unexpected results in staple placement, try using a different feed orientation. For example, find a paper tray on your printer where you can insert letter paper with the short edge towards the printer rather than the long edge.
• You might want to avoid some staple positions. For example, if you are printing on both sides of the paper and want to flip your pages up, you should not select more than one staple if the paper is fed from the long edge.
Using two or more staples will prevent you from flipping the paper up.
• If your stapler head cannot move, then there are some corners on the paper that staples cannot be placed. For portrait orientation, a staple can be placed only on the upper-left or the lower right corners. For landscape orientation, a staple can be placed only on the lower-left or upper-right corners.
Fold/Saddle Stitch option
The
Fold/Saddle Stitch
check box is available only when you have the HP Multifunction Finisher installed on your printer and configured in the driver. Use this option when you are printing a booklet.
Pages per Sheet
The
Pages per Sheet
drop-down menu provides six settings: 1 (default), 2, 4, 6, 9, and 16. If you type another value into the box (for example, 3), the control rounds that value to the nearest valid value (in this example, 4).
Print Page Borders
Related controls indented beneath the
Pages per Sheet
edit box are
Print Page Borders
and
Page Order
, which become active when
Pages Per Sheet
is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders
sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The
Page Order
drop-down menu contains four selections:
•
Right, then Down
•
Down, then Right
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
•
Left, then Down
•
Down, then Left
The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following illustration.
Figure 17: Page-order preview images
•
2 pages per sheet
•
4 pages per sheet
•
6 pages per sheet
•
9 pages per sheet
•
16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Paper
,
Destination
,
Basics
, and
Color
tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the preview image. When you move the mouse over the preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image. The pale-yellow dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes. Click on the label to toggle between English and metric units.
Print Quality
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer driver
Print Quality
group box provides options that control resolution, graphics settings, and font settings.
The default setting for
Print Quality
is
Default
. To change the default print quality settings, click the
Details
button.
Clicking the
Details
button opens the
Print Quality Details
dialog box. The
Print Quality Details
dialog box has different options depending on the driver you are using.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
75
Print Quality Details for the PCL 6 driver
The
Print Quality Details
dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the PCL 6 driver as shown in the following illustration.
Figure 18: Print Quality Details dialog box for HP traditional PCL 6 driver
76
The following options are available.
•
Current Settings
group box
•
Graphics Settings
group box
•
Output Settings
group box
•
Font Settings
group box
Current Settings group box
The
Current Settings
group box has three states in the HP traditional PCL 6 driver:
•
This is the "Faster Printing" setting
•
This is the "Best Quality" setting
•
This is a "Custom" setting
This is the "Best Quality" setting
appears if you select
Best Quality
in the
Print Quality
group box on the
Finishing
tab.
This is the "Faster Printing" setting
, the default setting, appears if you select
Faster Printing
in the
Print Quality
group box on the
Finishing
tab.
This is a "Custom" setting
appears if you select
Custom
in the
Print Quality
group box on the
Finishing
tab.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Graphics Settings group box
The
Graphics Settings
group box in the HP traditional PCL 6 driver has settings under
Raster Compression
for compressing graphics. The following options are available in the
Raster Compression:
drop-down menu:
•
Automatic
. This is the default setting. When this option is selected, the printer driver determines the best compression method to use.
•
Best Quality
. This setting forces the driver to use a compression method that results in no loss of data during compression.
•
Maximum Compression
. Where applicable, this setting requires the printer driver to use a compression method that maximizes compression. This setting can result in a loss of quality in the printed output.
Output Settings
The
Output Settings
group box contains controls for selecting resolution and other print-job settings, including pattern scaling and printing all text as black.
For the HP LaserJet 6 driver, the Default values for output settings are as follows:
•
Resolution is
600 dpi
•
Raster Compression
is set to
Automatic
•
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
is selected
•
Print all Text as Black
is
not
selected
•
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
is
not
selected
Resolution
There is a single
Resolution:
setting for the HP traditional PCL 6 driver,
600 dpi
. "Resolution" refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to print the page.
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
Use the
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
feature to address the moiré effect created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is on by default.
Print all Text as Black
The
Print all Text as Black
feature is off by default. When selected, this option causes the driver to print all text as black regardless of the original document text color. By design, white text remains white as a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background. This setting does not affect graphic images on the page.
Print all
Text as Black
remains selected only for the current print job. When the current print job is completed,
Print all Text as Black
is automatically turned off.
Font Settings group box
In the
Font Settings
group box, the only available option is
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
, which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType (TM) fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
check box is not selected by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
77
Print Quality Details for the PCL 5c driver
The
Print Quality Details
dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the PCL 5c driver as shown in the following illustration.
Figure 19: Print Quality Details dialog box for HP traditional PCL 5c driver
78
The following options are available.
•
Current Settings
group box
•
Graphics Settings
group box
•
Output Settings
group box
•
Font Settings
group box
Current Settings group box
The
Current Settings
group box has two states in the HP traditional PCL 5c driver:
•
This is the "Default" Setting
•
This is a "Custom" Setting
This is the "Default" Setting
is enabled when the setting under
Rendering Mode:
is
Automatic
.
When any other setting under
Rendering Mode:
is enabled, the
Current Setting
value becomes
This is a "Custom"
Setting
.
Graphics Settings group box
The
Graphics Settings
group box in the HP traditional PCL 5c driver has settings for the graphics rendering mode.
The following
Rendering Mode:
option buttons are available:
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
•
Automatic
(this is the default setting)
•
Send Graphics as Vector
. Select this setting to send graphics to the printer as a combination of
HP Graphics Language, version 2 (HP-GL/2) and raster images. This setting might produce higher-quality output.
•
Send Graphics as Raster
. Select this setting to send all graphics to the printer as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed in some cases.
•
Send Page as Raster
. Select this setting to send all graphics and text (TrueType fonts) to the printer as images composed of individual dots. Use
Send Page as Raster
if you are experiencing problems with overlapping text and graphics. With this setting, the
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
option has no effect.
Output Settings
The
Output Settings
group box contains controls for selecting resolution and other print-job settings, including pattern scaling and Printing All Text as Black.
For the HP LaserJet 5c drivers, the Default values for output settings are as follows:
•
Resolution is
600 dpi
•
Rendering mode
is set to
Automatic
•
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
is selected
•
Print all Text as Black
is
not
selected
•
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
is
not
selected
Resolution
There is a single
Resolution:
setting for the HP traditional PCL 5c driver,
600 dpi
. "Resolution" refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to print the page.
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
Use the
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
feature to address the moiré effect created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is on by default.
Print all Text as Black
The
Print all Text as Black
feature is off by default. When selected, this option causes the driver to print all text as black regardless of the original document text color. By design, white text remains white as a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background. This setting does not affect graphic images on the page.
Print all
Text as Black
remains selected only for the current print job. When the current print job is completed,
Print all Text as Black
is automatically turned off.
Font Settings group box
In the
Font Settings
group box, the only available option is
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
, which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType (TM) fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The
Send TrueType as Bitmaps
check box is not selected by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
79
Effects tab features
Use the
Effects
tab to create unique paper effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following illustration shows the
Effects
tab.
Figure 20: Effects tab
80
The
Effects
tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets
group box
•
Fit to Page
group box
• Document preview image
•
Watermarks
group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The
Print Task Quick Sets
control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all other
Document Defaults
or
Printing Preferences
driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this guide.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Fit to Page group box
The
Fit to Page
group box consists of the following controls.
•
Print Document On
setting
•
Scale to Fit
option
•
% of Normal Size
setting
Print Document On setting
Select the
Print Document On
check box to format the document for one paper size and then print the document on a different paper size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new paper size.
The
Print Document On
control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
•
The
% of Normal Size
value is not 100.
•
The
Pages per Sheet
value (on the
Finishing
tab) is not 1.
When
Print Document On
is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media source and any custom sizes that you have created (if the currently selected media source is manual, auto, or any tray). When
Print Document On
is selected,
Scale to Fit
is automatically selected.
Scale to Fit option
The
Scale to Fit
option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target paper size.
By default,
Scale to Fit
is selected when
Print Document On
is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target paper. If the document size is larger than the target paper size, then the document image is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target paper. The following illustration shows preview images for a document formatted for legal-size paper with the
Print Document On
check box selected, and the target size specified as
Letter.
Figure 21: Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size option
The
% of Normal Size
option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100 percent of normal size. Normal size is defined as the paper size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the paper size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
81
The limits of the range are from 25 percent to 400 percent, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator is dragged, and the preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by one percent. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10 percent.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows resolution; use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the desired value, and then use the scroll bar arrows to refine the value.
The following settings disable
% of Normal Size
:
•
Print Document On
is selected
•
Pages per Sheet
is not 1
Document preview image
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the
Document Defaults
or
Printing Preferences
driver tabs (the
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Paper
,
Destination
,
Basics
, and
Color
tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this document.
Watermarks
Use the
Watermarks
feature to choose a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
•
(none)
•
Confidential
•
Draft
•
SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When
First Page Only
is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The
First Page
Only
check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
82
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when
Pages per Sheet
is set to "4" and
First Page Only
is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Click
Edit,
and the
Watermark Details
dialog box appears.
Figure 22: Watermark details
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and font attributes.
Click
OK
to accept all of the changes that are made in the
Watermark Details
dialog box. However, clicking
Cancel
does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark, and then select a different watermark or click
New
, all of the changes made to the previous watermark are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
Current watermarks
The
Current Watermarks
group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks made available in the driver and any new watermarks you have created.
To create a new watermark, click
New
. The new watermark appears in the
Current Watermarks
list and in the
Watermark Message
edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you type in the
Watermark Message
field appears in the
Current Watermarks
group box in the
Watermark Details
dialog box and in the
Watermarks
group box on the
Effects
tab.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the
Watermark Message
edit box. To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the
Current Watermarks
list and click
Delete
. A warning appears asking whether
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
83
Note
you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click
Cancel
if you want to keep the watermark. Click
OK
to delete the selected watermark.
You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the
Current Watermarks
list at one time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the
New
button is disabled, and a Bubble Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to enable it.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the
Current Watermarks
list. If you change the
Watermark
Message
for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark message
The
Watermark Message
is also the name that identifies the watermark in the
Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different font or size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example,
Draft #2
). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique.
Message angle
Use the controls in the
Message Angle
group box to print the watermark in different orientations in relation to the page's text. The settings are
Diagonal
,
Horizontal
, or
Angle
(custom). The default is
Diagonal
. All three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement.
Diagonal
places the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
Horizontal
places the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right edges of the page.
Angle
places the text at the specified angle across the page.
Font attributes
Use the controls in the
Font Attributes
group box to change the font and the color, shading, size, and style of the font.
Name
The
Name
drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is languagedependent.
Color
The
Color
drop-down menu lists the fixed, unalterable color choices for the watermark. The color options are:
•
Gray
•
Red
•
Yellow
•
Green
•
Cyan
•
Blue
•
Magenta
Shading
The following range of shades is available from the
Shading
drop-down menu:
•
Lightest
•
Very Light
(default)
84
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
•
Light
•
Medium Light
•
Medium
•
Medium Dark
•
Dark
•
Very Dark
•
Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used for the
Color
attribute. A choice of
Light
plus
Gray
(from the
Color
attribute) produces a lightly saturated gray watermark. A choice of
Lightest
plus
Gray
produces the lightest shade of watermark;
Darkest
plus
Gray
produces a black watermark.
Size
Font sizes from
1
to
999
points are available from the
Size
menu. The default point size is language-dependent. The choice of
Regular
,
Bold
,
Italic
, and
Bold Italic
is available from the
Style
drop-down menu.
Default settings
The default settings for new watermarks are
Arial
font,
Gray
color,
Very Light
shading,
150
points, and
Regular
style.
The default settings for preset watermarks are
Arial
font,
Gray
color,
Very Light
shading
, and Bold
style. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent, and varies.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
85
Paper tab features
Use the
Paper
tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media, as well as to define a custom paper size. If you want to, you can use this tab to indicate different paper-selection choices for the first page and back cover of the document. The following illustration shows the
Paper
tab.
Figure 23: Paper tab
86
The
Paper
tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets
group box
•
Document preview image
•
Printer image
•
All Pages
minitab set
The first group box in the upper-left portion of the
Paper tab
view is
Print Task Quick Sets
. This feature is described in the "Finishing tab features" section. Any change to the
Print Task Quick Sets
group box that is made on the
Paper
tab affects the group box on the
Finishing
tab and on the
Destination
tab, and vice versa - they are all one and the same control.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Print Task Quick Sets
The
Print Task Quick Sets
control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all other
Document Defaults
or
Printing Preferences
driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this guide.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the
Document Defaults
or
Printing Preferences
driver tabs (the
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Paper
,
Destination
,
Basics
, and
Color
tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this document.
Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the
Paper
tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer and corresponds to its configuration data, either obtained automatically through bidirectional communication or configured manually. The bitmap image should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the
Destination
tab and the
Configure
tab.
On the
Paper
tab, the printer image contains hot spots where you can select a paper source. When the pointer moves over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to the gloved hand used in the Bubble Help, the preview image, and other areas.
The current paper source, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a printer-image hot spot, is highlighted in bright green on the printer bitmap. The following points are worth noting:
•
The
Auto Select
setting in the
Source is:
drop-down menu does not have a corresponding area to highlight in the printer image. Selecting other settings in this menu highlights the corresponding area in the printer image.
•
Selecting the area that represents tray in the bitmap always selects the corresponding tray in the
Source is:
option.
Manual Feed
, which is available from the
Source is:
option, cannot be selected by selecting the bitmap.
•
On the
Paper
tab, only input trays have printer-image hot spots and can be highlighted. Output bins must be selected from the
Destination
tab.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
87
All Pages minitab set
The controls on this minitab are contained in an
All Pages
minitab. As the name implies, this means that the settings specified on that minitab apply to all of the pages of the document. The following illustration shows the
All Pages
minitab set.
Figure 24: First Page, Other Pages, and Back Cover minitabs
Note
The printer image shown in the following illustration might differ from your HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer, depending on the model number and accessory devices.
When you select the
Use different paper for first page
check box, the
All Pages
minitab is replaced by the following minitabs.
•
First Page
, which contains the same controls as
All Pages
.
•
Other Pages
, which contains different controls, as noted in the following sections.
•
Back Cover
, which also contains different controls, as noted in the following sections.
88
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
The following illustration shows the
First Page, Other Pages, and Back Cover
minitabs.
Figure 25: First Page, Other Pages, and Back Cover minitabs
Using the First Page and Other Pages minitabs
A cover can have two forms, depending on the type of booklet you are printing:
• For a full-size book (for example, Letter size, Letter type), select a different media for the first page and add an extra blank back page. The front cover can contain print or be a blank page, and can either be pulled from a different paper source or be of another media type. The back cover can be printed on a different media from the front cover.
•
For two-page-per-sheet (2-up) booklet printing, you can obtain a cover by selecting a different media for the first page only. The back cover setting is hidden, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
Whenever you make changes to all of the pages (that is, when
Use different paper for first page
is not selected), these changes are reflected in both the
First Page
and
Other Pages
settings whenever you set “Use different paper”.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
89
First Page minitab
The
All Pages
minitab turns into three minitabs when you select the
Use different paper for first page
check box:
First Page
,
Other Pages
, and
Back Cover
. The
First Page
minitab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 26: First Page minitab
90
The
First Page
minitab contains the following controls.
•
Use different paper for first page
check box
•
Size is:
drop-down menu
•
Custom
button, which opens the
Custom Paper Size
dialog box
Use different paper for first page check box
To select different media for the first page of a print job, follow these steps:
1. Click
File
, click
, and then click
Properties
.
2. Click the
Paper
tab, and then select the
Use different paper for first page
check box.
3. Click the
First Page
tab. In the
Size is:
,
Source is:
, and
Type is:
drop-down menus, select the size, source, and type settings for your cover.
Size is: drop-down menu
This feature actually functions as two controls: a drop-down menu that contains all of the the supported media sizes
(including any user-defined custom sizes) and a text label that indicates the dimensions of the selected size.
Moving the pointer over the text label causes the arrow to change to a gloved hand, indicating that the area beneath the pointer is selectable. Clicking here toggles the units of measure between inches and millimeters, offering the same options on the dimensions label in the preview image. Selecting a new size from the drop-down menu updates the media-dimensions text label as well as the preview image. Changing the orientation (on the
Basics
tab) also updates the dimensions text label.
You can specify size only for the first page or for all of the pages. On the
Other Pages
and
Back Cover
minitabs, the
Size is
drop-down menu does not appear because the media size must be consistent for all of the pages of the job.
Certain software programs can override this command and specify different media sizes within a single document. Any change in the media size selection causes the
Booklet Printing
feature to be turned off.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Custom button
The
Custom Paper Size
dialog box appears when you click the
Custom
button on the
Paper
tab. The following illustration shows the initial appearance of the
Custom Paper Size
dialog box.
Figure 27: Custom Paper Size dialog box
Note
When the
Custom Paper Size
dialog box appears, the drop-down menu content in the
Name
group contains is dependent on the current paper size selection in the
Paper
tab:
•
If the paper size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu contains the name of that custom size.
•
If the paper size selection is a standard paper size, then the drop-down menu shows the default name
Untitled
for a custom paper size.
In Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows Me, two names for the same size media can coexist (for example,
"big" and "BIG" can both be used as names for custom-size paper measuring 8.4 inches by 11 inches). In
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, both uppercase and lowercase names can be used, but they cannot be used to name the same paper size.
The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom paper-size names, and not against the standard paper-size names.
The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and capabilities are discussed in the "Dynamic command button" section of this guide.
Name drop-down menu
The
Name
drop-down menu shows the name of the last selected custom paper size. Use the
Name
drop-down menu to type new names for custom paper sizes and to select from the list of currently defined custom paper sizes.
The name that appears in the
Name
drop-down menu is dependent on the following conditions:
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
91
•
If a saved custom paper size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other controls in the dialog box have not been changed since then, the
Name
drop-down menu shows the name of the last selected custom paper size.
• If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or if a saved paper size has just been deleted, then the
Name
drop-down menu shows the default name of
Untitled
.
•
If a new name has been typed into the
Name
drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new size or renaming an existing size, then that new name remains in the drop-down menu until a saved custom paper size is selected from the drop-down menu.
If you type a new name into the
Name
drop-down menu, but then do not click the
Save
button, you should be able to change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved paper-size name is selected from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning, and replaced by the values of the selected custom paper size.
Dynamic command button
The button located to the right of the
Name
drop-down menu has three possible labels:
Save
,
Delete
, and
Rename
.
•
Save
is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the last save or since the selection of an existing custom paper size. Clicking the button causes the name in the
Name
drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved names. If a duplicate is found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing item. If you click
Yes
, the old item is updated with the new values. If you click
No
, the driver returns to the
Custom Paper Size
dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom paper names, and not against the standard paper-size names.
Whenever the command button has the
Save
title, it is the default button.
•
Delete
is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom paper size appears in the
Name
drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the drop-down menu or clicking the
Save
button. Clicking the
Delete
button causes the saved custom paper size to be deleted, after which the
Name
drop-down menu changes to
Untitled
, the height and width controls are unchanged, and the button title changes to
Save
.
•
Rename
is the button title when you type something into the
Name
drop-down menu after selecting an existing custom paper size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, the name of the stored custom paper size changes to match the contents of the
Name
drop-down menu. Whenever the command button has the
Rename
title, it is also the default button.
The following table illustrates the relationships between the
Name
drop-down menu, the command button, and the actions that take you from one state to another.
Table 16: Name drop-down menu text strings
1
State Drop-down menu contents
Untitled
Button label
Save
2
3
<user-typed text>
<name of saved item>
Save
Delete
Action
Click
Save
Type something into the
Name
drop-down menu
Change the width or height values 1
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu 3
Click
Save
Type something into the
Name
drop-down
3
2 menu
Change the width or height values 2
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu 3
1
3
2
Click
Delete
Type something into the
Name
drop-down menu
Change the width or height values
4
1
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu 3
Next state
92
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
4
State Drop-down menu contents
<user-typed text>
Button label
Rename
Action
Click
Rename
(when the name is unique) 3
Click
Rename
(when the name is a duplicate) 4
Type something into the
Name
drop-down menu
4
Change the width or height values 2
Select a saved item from the drop-down menu 3
Next state
Width and height controls
The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or by using the up and down arrows.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See the "Custom width and height control limits" section of this guide.
If units are in millimeters, the custom paper-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter. The custom paper-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter. Any nonnumerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is one millimeter or one-tenth of an inch, depending on the current measurement units.
Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the increment amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at which the values change.
Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending on the measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the
Measurement Units
button.
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum paper size for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer is 98 mm by 191 mm (3.86 inches by
7.5 inches) and the maximum is 311 mm by 469 mm (12.23 inches by 18.5 inches). The following table summarizes paper size limits for each paper-handling device.
Table 17: Custom width and height limits for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer
Media source or paper-handling accessory
Tray 1 (multipurpose)
Minimum size - width by height Maximum size - width by height
98 mm by 191 mm 306 mm by 469 mm
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
1
Duplex printing accessory
(3.86 inches by 7.5 inches)
148 mm by 210 mm
(5.83 inches by 8.27 inches)
148 mm by 210 mm
(5.83 inches by 8.27 inches)
182 mm by 210 mm
(7.17 inches by 8.27 inches)
148 mm by 210 mm
(5.83 inches by 8.27 inches)
(12.05 inches by 18.5 inches)
296 mm by 432 mm
(11.69 inches by 17.0 inches)
296 mm by 432 mm
(11.69 inches by 17.0 inches)
296 mm by 432 mm
(11.69 inches by 17.01 inches)
311 mm by 469 mm
(12.28 inches by 18.5 inches)
1- Tray 4 is available for the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn only.
Paper and envelope icons
The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
93
Measurement Units button
Use the
Measurement Units
button to toggle the unit of measurement between standard (inches) and metric
(millimeters) units of measurement.
Close button
The
Close
button closes the
Custom Paper Size
dialog box according to the logic in the following table. In all cases, any custom paper sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed or deleted) while the dialog box is open will remain in the paper size list in the
Paper
tab. The following table lists options that appear when you click the
Close
button.
Table 18: Close dialog box text strings
If the drop-down menu contains ...
Untitled Save
And the button says ...
<user-typed text>
<name of saved item>
<user-typed text>
Save
Delete
Rename
Then this happens when you click the Close button
The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.
The current paper size remains the same as it was when the
Custom
button was selected.
The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.
The current paper size remains the same as it was when the
Custom
button was selected.
The dialog box closes, and the current paper size is set to that which was last shown in the dropdown menu.
The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.
The current paper size remains the same as it was when the
Custom
button was selected.
Note
Source is: drop-down menu
The
Source is:
setting specifies the paper source to use for printing a document. Different printer models support different paper sources. The list of paper sources depends on the printer model and its accessories. Any optional paper trays that are installed through the
Configure
tab are also shown here.
The
Source is:
drop-down menu can contain the following options:
•
Auto Select
•
Manual Feed
•
Tray 1
•
Tray 2
(500-sheet tray)
•
Tray 3
(500-sheet tray)
•
Tray 4
(2000-sheet tray)
Tray 4 is available for the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn only.
94
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
The default setting is
Auto Select
. When this setting is selected, the printer uses the paper tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a paper source other than
Auto Select
, make sure that the correct paper size is loaded in the paper source.
If a conflict exists among paper source, size, and type, and you choose to keep the conflicting settings, the settings are processed in the following order: paper size, paper type, and then paper source.
For information about media sizes and types, see the “Media attributes” section of this guide.
Type Is
The
Type Is
drop-down menu shows all of the the paper types that the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer supports, as well as any user-defined types that have been created by a network administrator. The default setting is
Unspecified
, which allows the software program to select the paper type.
You cannot manually add custom paper types through the driver. Custom sizes can be added only if you use the bidirectional communication mechanism, so the sizes must already exist in the printer when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the information returned is an updated list of paper types. If bidirectional communication is not enabled, then the driver looks for custom paper types saved from a previous bidirectional communication query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom paper types are available through the driver.
The following standard types appear in the lists:
•
Bond
•
Cardstock (> 164 g/m
2
)
•
Color
•
Glossy (75 - 105 g/m
2
)
•
Envelope
•
Heavy (106 - 163 g/m
2
)
•
HP Heavy Glossy
•
Labels
•
Letterhead
•
Light (< 75 g/m
2
)
•
Non-HP Heavy Glossy
•
Plain
•
Preprinted
•
Prepunched
•
Recycled
•
Tough Paper
•
Transparency
•
Unspecified
For more information about media types and sizes, see the "Media attributes" section of this guide.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
95
Other Pages minitab
Use the
Other Pages
minitab to select an alternative media type or source for the pages that follow the first page of a document. The following illustration shows the
Other Pages
minitab.
Figure 28: Other Pages minitab
The
Other Pages
minitab contains the following controls.
•
Source is:
drop-down menu
•
Type is:
drop-down menu
Source is: drop-down menu
The
Source is:
setting specifies the paper source to use for printing a document. Different printer models support different paper sources. The list of paper sources depends on the printer model and its accessories. Any optional paper trays that are installed through the
Configure
tab are also shown here. For more information about the
Source
Is:
setting, see the "First Page minitab" section of this guide.
Type is: drop-down menu
The
Type is:
drop-down menu shows all of the the media types supported by the printer, as well as any user-defined types that have been created by a network administrator using Web JetAdmin. When you use the default setting,
Unspecified
, the printer uses the default media type, usually
Plain
.
96
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Back Cover minitab
The
Back Cover
minitab allows you to include a blank back cover on a document, or to include a back cover from a paper source different from that used for the remainder of the document. Use the
Back Cover
minitab to select an alternative media source (or the same source as
First Page
) from which a blank page is drawn and placed after the final page of the body of the document. The following illustration shows the
Back Cover
minitab.
Figure 29: Back Cover minitab
The
Back Cover
minitab is not available when
Booklet Printing:
is enabled on the
Finishing
tab.
The minitab contains three option buttons.
•
No back cover
option button (default)
•
Use the first page source
option button
•
Use an alternate source
option button
No Back Cover option button
No back cover
is selected as the default. The
Source is
and
Type is
drop-down menus are disabled, but their values are not changed. No Bubble Help is available for the inactive drop-down menus. The settings revert to defaults when
Use different paper for first page
is selected again.
Use the first page source option button
Clicking
Use the first page source
changes the value of the
Source is:
and
Type is:
drop-down menus to match the first page, if necessary, but the drop-down menus are inactive.
Use an alternate source option button
Clicking
Use an alternate source
activates the drop-down menus. The drop-down menu value defaults to the same source as that chosen for the
First Page
minitab.
Two drop-down menus become available when
Use an alternate source
is selected:
•
Source is:
drop-down menu (default)
•
Type is:
drop-down menu
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
97
Source is: drop-down menu
The
Source is:
setting specifies the paper source to use for printing a document. Different printer models support different paper sources. The list of paper sources depends on the printer model and its accessories. Any optional paper trays that are installed through the
Configure
tab are also shown here. For more information about the
Source
Is:
setting, see the "First Page minitab" section of this guide.
Type is: drop-down menu
The
Type is:
drop-down menu shows all of the the media types supported by the printer, as well as any user-defined types that have been created by a network administrator using Web JetAdmin. When you use the default setting,
Unspecified
, the printer uses the default media type, usually
Plain
.
Destination tab features
The
Destination
tab provides options for job storage and output bin selection. The following illustration shows the
Destination
tab.
Figure 30: Destination tab
98
The
Destination
tab contains the following controls.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
•
Print Task Quick Sets
group box
•
Destination Features
group box (visible only if the printer has a hard disk installed and configured)
•
Output Bin Options
group box
•
Document preview image
•
Printer image
Print Task Quick Sets
Use the
Print Task Quick Sets
control to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all other
Document Defaults
or
Printing Preferences
driver tabs.
Print Task Quick Sets
are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this guide.
Note
Destination Features
The
Destination Features
group box contains the
Job Storage
drop-down menu and the Job Storage
Settings
button. Clicking
Settings
opens the
Job Storage Settings
dialog box.
To see the
Destination Features
group box to use the
Job Storage
options, the printer must have a hard disk installed. A printer hard disk is an optional feature for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer and a standard feature of the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer. In addition to having a hard disk installed, the printer must also have the
Printer Hard Disk
selected in the
More
dialog box of the
Configure
tab.
Job Storage Settings dialog box
The following illustration shows the
Job Storage Settings
dialog box.
Figure 31: Job Storage Settings dialog box
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
99
100
The
Job Storage Settings
dialog box contains the following controls.
•
Job Storage Mode
group box
•
Job Notification Options
group box
•
User Name
group box
•
Job Name
group box
•
PIN
group box
Job Storage mode
Using the
Job Storage
feature on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer, you can store documents at the printer and then control their printing at the printer control panel. This feature is intended to provide greater flexibility, convenience, security, and cost savings.
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer offers the following
Job Storage Mode
options:
•
Off
•
Proof and Hold
•
Private Job
•
Quick Copy
•
Stored Job
These features and the settings that control them are described below.
Off
When selected, this option turns the
Job Storage
feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job will not be stored in the printer.
Proof and Hold
When selected, this option stores the print job and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job at the printer control panel.
You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the printer at the printer control panel.
After it is released for printing, the proof-and-hold job is immediately deleted from the printer. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-and-hold job to the printer with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you disconnect the power to the printer.
Private Job
Use this option to send a print job directly to the printer memory. Selecting
Private Job
activates the
PIN
field. The print job can be printed only after you type a PIN at the printer control panel. After the job is printed, the printer removes the job from the printer memory. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
After it is released for printing, the private job is immediately deleted from the printer. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job to the printer with the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job will overwrite the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you disconnect the power to the printer.
Using a PIN for Private Job
The
Private Job
option can be secured by a four-digit personal identification number (PIN). You must type in this number at the printer control panel before the printer prints the job.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
The box labeled
PIN
is usually inactive. Selecting
Private Job
activates the
PIN to Print:
box. The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (ASCII 0-30 through 0-39). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you type more than four characters, the characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until there are exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for
Private
Job
.
Quick Copy
When you select
Quick Copy
, a copy of the print job is stored on the hard disk, after which you can print additional copies of the print job at the control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the printer is set from the printer control panel.
The printer configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-and-hold jobs. The number is set at the printer control panel in the
Configuration
menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, a newer document will overwrite the oldest. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk will overwrite the existing document.
Quick Copy
jobs are deleted if you disconnect the power to the printer.
Note
Stored Job
Use the
Stored Job
option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk. The print job is stored in the printer as if it is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored in the printer hard disk, you can print the job at the printer control panel.
The job remains stored on the printer until it is deleted or overwritten by a document with the same user and job names. Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when power is interrupted. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the printer memory, which can then be printed only after you type in a PIN at the printer control panel.
(You can set the PIN in the
dialog box.) After the job is printed, the job remains in the printer memory and can be printed again at the printer control panel. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. Private mode is initiated by clicking the
Require PIN to Print
check box. In this mode, a PIN typed at the control panel is required to release the job.
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The
Require PIN to Print
option is activated if you click
Stored Job
. If selected, you must enter a PIN to make the stored job private.
A private stored job is not the same as a private job (see above). Private jobs are deleted from the printer memory after they are printed. Private stored jobs are retained in the printer memory after printing, but require that a PIN be typed each time they are printed.
Job notification options
When you use a
Job Storage
feature, your document is identified at the printer control panel by user name and job name. You can also use a PIN to make your print job more secure.
Clicking the
Display Job ID when printing
check box causes the
User Name
,
Job Name
, and
PIN
group boxes to become available. The
Display Job ID when printing
check box is selected by default.
User Name
Use the
User Name
edit box to identify the job at the printer control panel. When the driver is first installed (or when
Default Print Settings
in the
Print Task Quick Sets
drop-down menu is selected), this string initializes to the empty string (""), but the dialog box detects this condition and replaces the string with your login name in Windows 95,
Windows 98, and Windows NT 4.0. Restrictions for the
User Name
field are described in the "Job Name" section of this guide.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
101
Job Name
Use the
Job Name
edit box to specify a name to identify the job at the printer control panel. When the driver is first installed (or when
Default Print Settings
in the
Print Task Quick Sets
drop-down menu is selected), this string initializes to the empty string (""), but the dialog box detects this condition and replaces the string with
Untitled
.
The
Job Name
and the
User Name
fields can contain no more than 16 characters each, and are limited to A through
Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the printer control panel display. If you try to type a lowercase character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character with an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab
key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with
Untitled
. In those languages for which
Untitled
cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for job name and user name vary for each operating system. The string must be of a length and type that can appear on the printer control panel display.
PIN
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. The
Require PIN to Print
option is activated if you click either of the following options.
•
Stored Job
. If selected, you must enter a PIN to make the stored job private. For more information, see the
"Stored Job" section of this guide.
•
Private Job
. If selected, you must type in the PIN number at the printer control panel to make the job print. For more information, see the "Using a PIN for Private Job" section of this guide.
Note
Using Job Storage options when printing
You can use
Job Storage
options in the
Destination
tab of the printer driver.
The printer driver that is installed on your computer must be configured to use the
Job Storage
features. To enable
Job Storage
, click
Start
, click
Settings
, click
Printers
, and then right-click the printer icon. Click
Properties
, click the
Configure
tab, and then select the
Job Storage Enabled
check box.
Note
1. Click
from the software program. The
dialog box appears.
2. Click
Properties
. The
Properties
dialog box appears.
3. Click the
Destination
tab to show the destination options.
4. Click
Job Storage
on the drop-down menu under
Destination Features
.
5. Click
Settings
. The
Job Storage Settings
dialog box appears. You can then select one of the Job Storage options described above by clicking the appropriate option button.
These instructions are specific to the Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0
environments when using the latest available PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers. The basic concepts of the
Job Storage
feature are the same for PS print jobs, but significant differences in the driver user interface exist. Also, some limitations in naming and PIN selection exist.
Releasing private jobs stored at the printer
After you send a private job using the
Job Storage
feature, you can release the job to print by using the printer control panel.
1. Press the select button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to RETRIEVE JOB, and then press the select button.
3. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the user name, and then press the select button.
4. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the job name, and then press the select button.
102
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
5. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT. The PRINT selection has an icon next to it indicating that the job is locked and requires a PIN to print. Press the select button.
6. Type in the PIN using the control panel number pad, and then press the select button.
7. Indicate the number of copies you wish to print, and then press the select button. The default is one copy.
8. The private job prints and then is deleted from the hard disk.
Note
Deleting a print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the printer hard disk. You can do this by using the printer control panel.
1. Press the select button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to RETRIEVE JOB.
3. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the user name, and then press the select button.
4. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the job name, and then press the select button.
5. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to DELETE, and then press the select button.
The DELETE selection might have an icon next to it indicating that the job is locked. If so, type the PIN number, and then press the select button.
6. The stored print job is deleted and the printer returns to the Ready state.
Note
Output bin options
The
Output Bin Options
group box contains a drop-down menu that you can use to select an output bin from a list of configured output bins. Only output bins that are configured on the
Configure
tab appear in this drop-down menu.
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer comes with two output bins. Print jobs use the top output bin when the rear output bin is closed. When the rear output bin is open, print jobs use this bin and emerge face-up from the printer.
The output bin options that can be selected in the driver are:
•
The
Top Bin (Face-Down)
option refers to the main output bin at the top of the printer. The print jobs sent to this bin are delivered face-down. This option is always available and has no media size or type constraints beyond those determined by the printer hardware.
When using the face-down output bin, you must manually switch the bin between face-down and face-up output.
•
The
Left Bin (Face-Up)
option refers to the bin on the left side of the printer. The print jobs sent to this bin are delivered face-up.
The HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer comes standard with one of the following output devices.
•
HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker.
This single 3000-sheet stacking device accommodates up to 3,000 sheets of Letter-sized and A4-sized paper, or up to 1,500 sheets of 11-inch by 17-inch and A3 paper. It provides multi-position stapling for up to 50 sheets of paper per document.
•
HP 3000-Sheet Stacker.
This single, 3000-sheet stacking device accommodates up to 3,000 sheets of Lettersized and A4-sized paper, or up to 1,500 sheets of 11-inch by 17-inch and A3 paper.
•
HP Multifunction Finisher
. This booklet-printing device creates booklets and stapled documents in a variety of sizes.
Options
The
Options
drop-down menu is inactive. You can use this setting to enable non-HP paper-handling devices.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the
Document Defaults
or
Printing Preferences
driver tabs (the
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
103
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Paper
,
Destination
,
Basics
, and
Color
tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this document.
Note
Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the
Destination
tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer according to the driver configuration data (obtained automatically through bidirectional communication, or configured manually through the driver). The bitmap image should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the
Paper
tab and the
Configure
tab.
The printer image shown in the illustration might differ from your HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer, depending on the model number and the installed accessory devices.
Note
On the
Destination
tab, the printer image contains hot spots for selecting an output bin. When the pointer moves over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to the gloved hand used in the Bubble Help, the preview image, and other areas. The current output bin is highlighted in a bright green color on the printer bitmap.
On the
Destination
tab, only output bins have hot spots and can be highlighted; source trays must be selected from the
Paper
tab.
104
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Basics tab features
The
Basics
tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation of the print job.
You can also use the
Basics
tab to retrieve information about the driver.
Figure 32: Basics tab
The
Basics
tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets
group box
•
Copies
group box
•
Orientation
group box
• Document preview image
•
About
button
Print Task Quick Sets
The
Print Task Quick Sets
control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all other
Document Defaults
or
Printing Preferences
driver tabs.
Print Task Quick Sets
are either preset or userdefined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this guide.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
105
Copies
Use the
Copies
feature to specify the number of copies to print.
The number of copies you request appears in the
Copies
box. You can select the number by typing in the edit box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the edit box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999 for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer. The copies value does not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the
Basics
tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Conflicts between the software program you are using and the driver can arise because you can set the number of copies you want from some software programs. In most cases, the software program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the software program) appears in the other (such as the driver).
For some software programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these software programs, setting 10 copies in the software program and then setting 10 copies in the driver results in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the software program, whenever possible.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the manner in which media is fed into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are
Portrait
,
Landscape
, and
Rotated
. The default orientation is
Portrait
.
The three orientation options have these configurations:
•
Portrait
. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the paper.
•
Landscape
. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the paper.
•
Rotate by 180 degrees
. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180 degrees. This setting is useful for printing envelopes and when using some third-party paper-handling devices.
You can can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by left-clicking the preview image. If you select the
Rotate by 180 degrees
check box, there is no change in the preview image.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the
Document Defaults
or
Printing Preferences
driver tabs (the
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Paper
,
Destination
,
Basics
, and
Color
tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this document.
106
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
About button
By clicking the
About
button on the
Basics
tab or clicking the HP logo on any of the driver property pages, the
About
This Driver
dialog box appears. To close the
About
box, click
OK
, press
Esc
, press
Alt
+
F4
, or press
Enter
. The following figure shows the
About This Driver
dialog box. The information it contains varies according to the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 model number, driver, date, and versions.
Figure 33: About This Driver dialog box
The
About
tab indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
Driver extensions
The
Driver Extensions
text box provides you with information about any extended driver functionality. It can contain a brief description of the driver extension and a version number.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
107
Color tab features
Use the
Color
tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and halftone settings.
Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The
Color
tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 34: Color tab
108
The
Color
tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets
group box
• Document preview image
•
Color Options
group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The
Print Task Quick Sets
control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all other
Document Defaults
or
Printing Preferences
driver tabs.
Print Task Quick Sets
are either preset or userdefined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this guide.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Document preview image
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the
Document Defaults
or
Printing Preferences
driver tabs (the
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Paper
,
Destination
,
Basics
, and
Color
tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this document.
Color options
Use the
Color Options
group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print job color rendering and print quality.
To use default coloration settings, click the
Automatic
option button. To change the default coloration settings, click the
Manual
option button, and then click the
Settings
button. To convert color information to grayscale and print the document in black and white, select the
Print in Grayscale
checkbox.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
109
Manual color settings
When you click the
Settings . . .
option button, the
Color Settings
dialog box appears. The default settings are shown in the following illustration. To change the settings, make your selections using the drop-down menus in the
Color
Settings
dialog box, and then click
OK
. You are then prompted to save your selections as
Custom
or
Manual
settings.
Figure 35: Manual Color Options dialog box
110
The
Manual Color Options
dialog box gives you independent control of neutral grays and halftone for three major components: text, graphics, and photographs.
The
Neutral Grays
drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the printer firmware. The options are
Black Only
or
4-Color
. You can adjust the
Neutral Grays
setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs.
•
Black Only.
This option generates neutral colors (grays and blacks) using only black toner, which ensures that neutral colors do not have a color cast.
•
4-Color.
This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black.
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
The
Halftone
settings control the selection of a device-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the printer firmware. The
Halftone
options,
Text
and
Detail
, affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can independently adjust halftone settings for text, graphics, and photos.
•
Text.
This option is optimized for the best reproduction of normal to small text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors. Choose this option when the sharp edges of small objects, especially those that contain secondary colors (such as red, green, and blue), are the top priority.
•
Detail.
This option is optimized for the best reproduction of images, graphics, and large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when the color fidelity of large objects is the top priority.
The
RGB Color
settings affect the color treatment for object types and determines how colors are rendered. The options are
Default (sRGB)
,
Device
, and
Vivid
.
•
Default (sRGB).
This option interprets RGB color as standard default RGB color space (sRGB), which is the accepted standard for many software companies and organizations such as Microsoft and the Worldwide Web
Consortium.
•
Device.
This option sets the printer to print RGB data in the raw device mode. To render photographs properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the software program in which you are working or in the operating system.
•
Vivid.
This option sets the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones. Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully. This value is recommended for printing business graphics.
If your software program converts text and graphics to raster, the
Photographs
settings also control the
Text
and
Graphics
settings.
The
General Color Options
settings are
Edge Control
and
RGB Color
. The
Edge Control
setting, which determines how edges are rendered, consists of two components:
Adaptive Halftoning
and
Trapping
. The
Adaptive Halftoning
setting increases the edge sharpness of text and graphics while maintaining the quality of area fills. The
Trapping
setting reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. The following options are available:
•
Off
, which sets
Trapping
and
Adaptive Halftoning
to
Off
.
•
Light
, which provides minimal trapping.
Adaptive Halftoning
is set to
On
.
•
Normal
, which provides the default
Trapping
setting.
Adaptive Halftoning
is set to
On
.
•
Maximum
, which provides the most trapping.
Adaptive Halftoning
is set to
On
.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
111
Note
Configure tab features
The
Configure
tab can be found in the
Properties
for the printer driver. To gain access to the printer driver
Properties
, click
Start
on your Window task bar, click
Settings
, and then click
Printers
(for Windows XP and
Windows Server 2003, click
Printers and Faxes
). Right-click the printer name, and then click
Properties
.
Use the
Configure
tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the printer. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up the
Configure
tab by clicking the
Update Now
button. If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the
Update Now
button is unavailable so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
The
Configure
tab is available when the driver is opened from the
Printers
folder by clicking
Properties
. When you open the driver from within a software program, the
Configure
tab is not visible (with a few exceptions, such as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel (R) Chart 4.0). When opened from the
Printers
folder, the
Configure
tab looks like the following illustration.
Figure 36: Configure tab
112
The
Configure
tab contains the following controls.
•
Printer Model
group box
•
Paper Handling Options
group box
•
Other Options
group box
•
Automatic Configuration
group box
• Printer image
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Printer Model group box
In the
Printer Model
group box, the driver title remains HP Color LaserJet 9500 for both models. If you select another printer model on the
Configure
tab, the appropriate changes to the other configuration options on the tab are also made.
Printer model defaults
The following are the default settings for each printer model in the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer series.
HP Color LaserJet 9500n
When you select the HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer, the following settings apply.
On the Configure tab
•
The
Total Printer Memory
value is 128 MB.
•
The value shown in the
(DWS)
dialog box is 5.0 MB.
•
The
Duplexing Unit
check box is not selected.
•
The
Mopier Enabled
check box is not available and not selected.
•
Optional Paper Destinations
is set to
None
.
•
Optional Paper Sources
is set to
None
.
On the More Configuration Options dialog box
When you click the
More
button in the
Other Options
group box on the
Configure
tab, the
More Configuration
Options
dialog box appears. The following defaults are found here.
•
The
Printer Hard Disk
check box is not available and not selected.
•
The
Job Storage Enabled
check box is not available and not selected.
•
The
Font DIMM(s)
check box is not selected and the
Configure
button is not available.
•
The
Ignore Application Collation
check box is not available and not selected.
•
The
Include Types in Application Source List
check box is selected.
HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn
When you select the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer, the following settings apply:
On the Configure tab
•
The
Total Printer Memory
value is 256 MB.
•
The value shown in the
(DWS)
dialog box is 5.0 MB.
•
The
Duplexing Unit
check box is selected.
•
The
Mopier Enabled
check box is selected.
•
Optional Paper Destinations
is set to
None
.
•
Optional Paper Sources
is set to
2000-Sheet Paper Tray
.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
113
On the More Configuration Options dialog box
When you click the
More
button in the
Other Options
group box on the
Configure
tab, the
More Configuration
Options
dialog box appears. The following defaults are found here.
•
The
Printer Hard Disk
check box is selected.
•
The
Job Storage Enabled
check box is selected.
•
The
Font DIMM(s)
check box is not selected and the
Configure
button is not available.
•
The
Ignore Application Collation
check box is selected.
•
The
Include Types in Application Source List
check box is selected.
Paper-handling options
The
Paper Handling Options
group box contains the following controls.
•
Duplexing Unit
check box
•
Mopier Enabled
check box
•
Optional Paper Destinations
drop-down menu
•
Optional Paper Sources
drop-down menu
Duplexing unit
Select this option if a duplexing unit is installed in the printer. When the
Duplexing Unit
option is selected, additional controls appear in the
Document Options
group box on the
Finishing
tab. Unlike most of the options in this group box, the
Duplexing Unit
option does not affect the printer image because the duplexing unit is contained within the printer. To print on both sides of the paper, click
from the program, click the
Properties
button, click the
Finishing
tab, and then click
Print on Both Sides
.
Mopier enabled
A mopier is an HP-designed printer that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases printer performance and reduces network traffic by sending the job to the printer once, then storing it. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed of the printer. All documents can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the desktop, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.
Both HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer models support the transmit-once mopying feature if the printer has a hard disk installed (the hard disk is standard on the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn and is an available option for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500n). The
Mopier Enabled
option is selected by default for the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer.
114
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Optional Paper Destinations
The
Optional Paper Destinations
drop-down menu contains the following options:
•
(None)
•
HP Multi-Function Finisher
•
HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
•
HP 3000-Sheet Stacker
The optional paper destinations are available for the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn only, although the options appear in the driver for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n also.
Optional Paper Sources
The
Optional Paper Sources
drop-down menu lists optional paper sources for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer. The list of available paper sources varies, depending on your printer, its input accessories, and the printer configuration settings on the
Configure
tab.
For the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer, two optional paper sources are available. The settings in the
Optional
Paper Sources
drop-down menu are as follows:
•
(None)
(the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer)
•
2000-Sheet Input Tray
(the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer)
Other options
The
Other Options
group box contains a single
More
command button. Clicking the
More
button opens the
More
Configuration Options
dialog box.
More configuration options
When you press the
More...
button under
Other Options
, more configuration options are available. The
More
Configuration Options
dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
115
Figure 37: More Configuration Options dialog box
Note
The
More Configuration Options
dialog box contains the following controls.
•
Storage
group box
•
Fonts
group box
•
Ignore Application Collation
check box
•
Printer Memory
group box
•
Include Types in Application Source List
check box
Storage
You can use the
Storage
section to specify whether
Job Storage
is enabled.
Job Storage
is automatically enabled if the printer has a hard disk installed.
Job Storage Enabled
determines whether
Job Storage
appears as a feature on the
Destination
tab. For more information, see the "Job Storage" section of this guide.
The HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn comes with a hard disk already installed. The hard disk is an available option for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n.
Fonts
The
Fonts
group box contains a
Font DIMM
check box and a corresponding
Configure
button. Selecting the
Font
DIMM
check box tells the driver that a Font DIMM is installed, and that stored data about the fonts on the DIMM is available. When the check box is selected, the
Configure
button is enabled. Click the
Configure
button to open the
Configure Font DIMMs
dialog box. If the
Font DIMM
check box was not selected when you opened the
More
Configuration Options
dialog box, selecting that check box automatically opens the
Configure Font DIMMs
dialog box.
116
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 38: Configure Font DIMMs dialog box
Note
Use the
Configure Font DIMMs
dialog box to perform the following tasks:
•
Add up to two font DIMMs by clicking the
Add
button.
•
Specify a unique font DIMM name.
•
Select specific font DIMM data files that contain lists of fonts on specified DIMMs.
•
Select one or more installed DIMMs in the
Installed DIMMs
list, and based on the selected DIMM(s). The list to the right (
Fonts on DIMMs
) shows all of the fonts available on the selected DIMM(s).
•
Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s).
Use the following procedure to configure a font DIMM.
1. Make sure that the font DIMM is correctly installed.
2. Click
Add
. The
Add Font DIMM
dialog box appears.
3. Click
Browse
. The
Font DIMM Files
dialog box appears.
4. Find and select the appropriate printer cartridge metrics (PCM) file that came with the font DIMM.
5. Click
Open
.
6. If you want to, specify a
Font DIMM Name
in the
Add Font DIMM
dialog box.
7. Click
OK
. The selected printer cartridge metrics (.PCM) file appears in the
Installed DIMMs
list. Select the
.PCM file to see a list of available fonts in the
Fonts on DIMM
list.
8. Click
OK
to close the
Add Font DIMM
dialog box. The fonts on the DIMM should now be available on the system.
When using font DIMMs with the PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers: To install screen fonts that match the font DIMM, use the .HPB file specifically designed to work with that DIMM. If there are no screen fonts for the DIMM, use the .
PCM file specifically designed to work with that DIMM.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
117
Ignore Application Collation
Use the
Ignore Application Collation
setting to allow the driver, rather than the software program, to manage collation.
You cannot use the
Ignore Application Collation
setting alone to print non-collated copies. If you want to print multiple copies of non-collated copies, make sure that the
Mopier Enabled
setting is
Off
and that that the
Collate
check box is not selected in the
dialog box of your software program.
The following table shows the expected behavior for a two-page print job when the number of copies is three. In some instances, the application collation setting overrides the
Ignore Application Collation
setting on the driver.
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Table 19: Printer behavior with Ignore Application Collation settings
Mopier Enabled setting
On
Collation check box
On
Ignore
Application
Application
Collation check
On
box in Print dialog box
Commands sent by printer
QTY=3
Pages sent to printer
1,2
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
None
On
Off
On
Off
None
None
On
Off
None
On
Off
None
QTY=3
Copies=3
Copies=1
Copies=3
Copies=1
Copies=3
QTY=3
QTY=3
1,2
1,2
1,2,1,2,1,2
1,2
1,2,1,2,1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
Pages output from printer
1,2,1,2,1,2
1,2,1,2,1,2
1,1,1,2,2,2
1,2,1,2,1,2
1,1,1,2,2,2
1,2,1,2,1,2
1,1,1,2,2,2
1, 2
1, 2
Note
Printer memory
Total Memory
shows the total amount of memory physically installed in the printer. The default values for the total printer memory are based on the printer model and are specified in the
Printer Model
setting of the
Configuration
tab. The total printer memory is updated through a successful bidirectional query, or it can be set manually.
The
(DWS)
value shows the amount of memory available for keeping track of the fonts that are downloaded from the driver. The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded the available memory value. The
(DWS)
value is a dynamic value that varies, depending on the product, the product model, the specific configuration of the printer, and the print job. An accurate
(DWS)
value optimizes driver performance.
The
(DWS)
value is configured automatically by the PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers in Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows
Me, and Windows NT 4.0 environments that support bidirectional communication. Use the
(DWS)
option to specify the amount of work-space memory that is available to the printer. To manually set the
(DWS)
value, print a configuration page and find the
DWS
value in the Memory section of the configuration page. Then, click the
More...
button on the
Configuration
tab, and type the DWS value in the
(DWS)
field of the
More Configuration Options
dialog box. The
(DWS)
value might change if you switch printer-model settings.
Include types in application source list
When the
Include types in application source list
check box is selected, all paper types (such as envelopes and transparencies) are available from the
Source is:
list on the
Paper
tab. When you are in a software program, you can open the
Paper
tab by clicking
from the
File
menu, and then clicking
Properties
.
This option is available only when using a computer that is running Windows NT 4.0.
118
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Automatic configuration
If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer since installation, click the
Update
Now
button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. For more information about the driver automatic configuration feature, see the "Driver Autoconfiguration" section of this guide.
Note
Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the
Configure
tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer according to the driver configuration data (which can be obtained automatically through bidirectional communication, or configured manually in the
Paper-Handling Options
group box). The printer image should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the
Paper
tab and the
Destination
tab.
The printer image shown in the illustration might differ from your HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer, depending on the model number and the installed accessory devices.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features
119
Note
NT Forms tab features
The
NT Forms
tab can be found in the
Properties
for the printer driver.
To gain access to the printer driver
Properties
, click
Start
on your Window task bar, click
Settings
, and then click
Printers
(for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click
Printers and Faxes
). Right-click the printer name, and then click
Properties
.
The
NT Forms
tab appears only in the Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 operating environment. You can view the
NT Forms
tab (like the
Configure
tab) only from the
Properties
window. The following illustration shows the
NT Forms
tab.
Figure 39: Driver NT Forms tab
120
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Use the
NT Forms
tab to specify which media sizes and types are loaded in each of the available paper trays. This constrains the choices available in the
Size
and
Type
lists on the
Paper
tab. This constraint prevents information overload if you request unavailable sizes or types.
The
NT Forms
tab contains a single group box, the
Form/Tray Assignments
group box, which contains the following controls.
•
Available Trays
is a drop-down menu that contains all of the the printer trays that are specified on the
Configure
tab.
•
This Tray Contains/Size (Forms)
drop-down menu contains a list of standard paper sizes the HP Color
LaserJet 9500 series printer supports, as well as any custom forms that are defined in the
NT Forms
tab.
•
This Tray Contains/Type
drop-down menu lists all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer supports.
•
Clear All
button removes all of the the size and type constraints on the
Paper
tab.
Configuring the trays
1. Select the appropriate tray from the
Available Trays
list.
2. Use the
This Tray Contains/Size (Forms)
drop-down menu to select the paper size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.
3. Use the
This Tray Contains/Type
drop-down menu to select the paper type that is configured for the tray.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the remaining trays.
5. If necessary, click the
Clear All
button to reconfigure all of the the trays, and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the
Paper
tab.
HP traditional PS driver features
This section provides information about the features of the HP traditional PS printer driver.
Adobe PostScript (R) 3 (TM) emulation support for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer
Note
A set of 92 Adobe PostScript 3 emulation (PS) soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to permanently install the fonts in the printer, PS fonts are also available from HP in an optional font DIMM. The PS emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PS when PS fonts are purchased from Adobe.
Users of Adobe-licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PS printer drivers from Adobe with the
HP LaserJet printer PostScript 3 emulation PPD, available on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer software CD-ROM or from the HP Web site. When using the Adobe PS printer driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on the Adobe Web site at:
http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html
See the "Font support" section of this guide for a list of the additional fonts.
The driver interface shown in this section is for Windows NT 4.0. The order and appearance of tabs can vary among operating systems.
What's this Help
In Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0, What's this? Help is supported. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PS driver features
121
•
Right-click a control and click
What's this?
, and a pop-up Help window appears.
•
Click the
?
button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. Use this special cursor to select a control, and the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.
•
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Page Setup tab features
The
Page Setup
tab controls paper and finishing options for the HP traditional PS driver. The following illustration shows the
Page Setup
tab.
Figure 40: Page Setup tab
122
The
Page Setup
tab contains the following controls.
•
Paper Size
drop-down menu
•
Paper Source
drop-down menu
•
Copy Count
spin box
•
Orientation
group box
•
Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing)
group box (This option appears for the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer by default and for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer if you have purchased, installed, and configured the optional Duplexing unit.)
•
Color Appearance
group box
HP traditional PS driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Advanced tab features
The
Advanced
tab controls settings for output, graphics, and printer features. The following illustration shows the
Advanced
tab.
Figure 41: Advanced tab
The
Advanced
tab contains the following controls.
•
Paper/Output
(advanced control over the options available on the
Page Setup
tab)
•
Graphic
(including resolution, scaling, and TrueType font controls)
•
Document Options
(including printer features and PS options)
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PS driver features
123
Job Storage tab features
Note
In order to see the
Job Storage
tab and to use the
Job Storage
options, the printer must have a hard disk installed. A printer hard disk is an optional feature for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer and a standard feature of the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer.
In addition to having a hard disk installed, the printer must also have the
Printer Disk
option set to
Installed
and the
Job Storage
option set to
Enabled
in the
Installable Options
section of the
Device Settings
tab in order to use the
Job Storage
options.
Note
Limited
Job Storage
functions for Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows Me operating systems are available under
Printer Features
on the PS driver
Advanced
tab.
The
Job Storage
tab is shown in the following figure.
Figure 42: Job Storage tab
124
The
Job Storage
tab contains the following controls.
•
Job Storage Mode
group box
•
Job Identification
group box
HP traditional PS driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Job Storage Mode
Use the
Job Storage
feature on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer to store documents at the printer, and then control their printing at the printer control panel. This feature is intended to provide greater flexibility, convenience, security, and cost savings.
After the
Job Storage
feature has been enabled, you can use its features by clicking
Settings
on the
Destination
tab of the printer driver.
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer offers the following
Job Storage
options:
•
Off
•
Proof and Hold
•
Private Job
•
Quick Copy
•
Stored Job
These features and the settings that control them are described below.
Off
When selected, the
Off
option turns the
Job Storage
feature off (it is disabled), which means that the print job is not stored in the printer.
Proof and Hold
When selected, the
Proof and Hold
option stores the print job and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job by using the printer control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the printer at the printer control panel.
After the proof-and-hold print job is released for printing, the print job is immediately deleted from the printer. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-and-hold job to the printer with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job overwrites the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you disconnect the power to the printer.
Private Job
Use the
Private Job
option to send a print job directly to the printer memory. Selecting
Private Job
activates the
PIN
field. The print job can be printed only after you type a four-digit personal identification number (PIN) using the printer control panel. After the job is printed, the printer removes the job from the printer memory. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
After the private print job is released for printing, the print job is immediately deleted from the printer. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job to the printer with the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job overwrites the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you disconnect the power to the printer.
Quick Copy
The
Quick Copy
option stores a copy of a printed job on the printer hard disk, after which you can print additional copies of a print job by using the printer control panel. You can set the number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the printer at the printer control panel.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PS driver features
125
Note
The printer configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-and-hold jobs. The number is set at the printer control panel in the
Configuration
menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, a newer document overwrites the oldest. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk overwrites the existing document.
Quick Copy
jobs are deleted if you disconnect the power to the printer.
Note
Stored Job
Use the
Stored Job
option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk. The print job is stored in the printer as if the printer is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored in the printer hard disk, you can print the job by using the printer control panel.
The job remains stored on the printer until it is deleted or overwritten by a document with the same user and job names. Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when power is interrupted. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the printer memory, which can then be printed only after you type in a PIN using the printer control panel.
(You can set the PIN in the
dialog box.) After the job is printed, the job remains in the printer memory and can be printed again by using the printer control panel. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. Private mode is initiated by clicking the
Require PIN to Print
check box. In this mode, a PIN typed at the control panel is required to release the job.
The box labeled
PIN
is usually inactive. The
Require PIN to Print
option is activated if you click
Stored Job
. If selected, you must enter a PIN to make the stored job private.
A
Stored Job
that has been made private is not the same as a
Private Job
. The
Private Jobs
are deleted from the printer memory after they are printed. The
Stored Jobs
that have been made private are retained in the printer memory after printing, but they require that you type in a PIN each time you want to print a private
Stored
Job
.
Using a PIN for the Private Job option
The
Private Job
option can be secured by a PIN. This number must be typed in the printer control panel before the printer prints the job.
The box labeled
PIN
is usually inactive. Selecting
Private Job
activates the
PIN
box. The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (ASCII 0-30 through 0-39). If you type non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you type more than four characters, the characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily accepts fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until there are exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the PIN is 0000 for
Private Job
.
Job Identification
When you use a
Job Storage
feature, your document is identified at the printer control panel by user name and job name.
User Name
Use the
User Name
edit box to identify the job at the printer control panel. When the driver is first installed (or when
Default Print Settings
in the
Print Task Quick Sets
drop-down menu is selected), this string initializes to the empty string (""), but the dialog box detects this condition and replaces the string with your login name in Windows 95,
Windows 98, and Windows NT 4.0. Restrictions for the
User Name
field are described in the "Job Name" section of this guide.
126
HP traditional PS driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Job Name
Use the
Job Name
edit box to specify a name to identify the job at the printer control panel. When the driver is first installed (or when
Default Print Settings
in the
Print Task Quick Sets
drop-down menu is selected), this string initializes to the empty string (""), but the dialog box detects this condition and replaces the string with
Untitled
.
The
Job Name
and the
User Name
fields can contain no more than 16 characters each, and are limited to A through
Z and 0 through 9 because the name appears on the printer control panel display. If you try to type a lowercase character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to type a character with an ASCII code of fewer than 32 or more than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it. If you try to type more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.
When the dialog box is closed, or the edit box loses focus, an empty string is replaced with
Untitled
. In those languages for which
Untitled
cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for
Job Name
and
User Name
vary for each operating system. The string must meet requirements to be able to appear on the printer control panel display.
Note
Using Job Storage options when printing
You can use
Job Storage
options in the
Destination
tab of the printer driver.
To use the
Job Storage
features, your printer must have a hard disk installed. The HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn comes with a hard disk. The hard disk is an available option for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n.
In addition to having a hard disk installed, the printer driver must be configured to use the
Job Storage
features.
To enable
Job Storage
, click
Start
, click
Settings
, click
Printers
, and right-click the printer icon. Click
Properties
, click the
Configure
tab, and select the
Job Storage Enabled
check box.
Note
1. Click
from the software program. The
dialog box appears.
2. Click
Properties
. The
Properties
dialog box appears.
3. Click the
Device Settings
tab to show the destination options.
4. Click
Job Storage
on the under
Installable Options
.
5. Click
Settings
. The
Change Job Storage Settings
dialog box appears.
You can then select one of the
Job Storage
options by clicking the appropriate option button.
These instructions are specific to the Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0
environments when using the latest available HP traditional PS driver. The basic concepts of the
Job Storage
feature are the same for PS print jobs, but significant differences in the driver user interface exist. Also, some limitations in naming and PIN selection exist.
Releasing private jobs stored at the printer
After you send a private job using the
Job Storage
feature, you can release the job to print by using the printer control panel.
1. Press the select button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to RETRIEVE JOB, and then press the select button.
3. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the user name, and then press the select button.
4. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the job name, and then press the select button.
5. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT. The PRINT selection has an icon next to it indicating that the job is locked and requires a PIN to print. Press the select button.
6. Type in the PIN using the control panel number pad, and then press the select button.
7. Indicate the number of copies you wish to print, and then press the select button. The default is one copy.
8. The private job prints and then is deleted from the hard disk.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PS driver features
127
Note
Deleting a print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the printer hard disk. This can be done by using the printer control panel.
1. Press the select button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to RETRIEVE JOB.
3. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the user name, and then press the select button.
4. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to the job name, and then press the select button.
5. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to DELETE, and then press the select button.
The DELETE selection might have an icon next to it indicating that the job is locked. If so, type the PIN number, and then press the select button.
6. The stored print job is deleted and the printer returns to the Ready state.
Note
Device Settings tab features
The
Device Settings
tab can be found in the
Properties
for the printer driver.
To gain access to the printer driver
Properties
, click
Start
on your Window task bar, click
Settings
, and then click
Printers
. Right-click the printer name, and then click
Properties
.
The
Device Settings
tab contains controls for paper-handling devices and controls for managing the HP Color
LaserJet 9500 series printer.
128
HP traditional PS driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
When you select features in the
Device Settings
tab that can be changed, a
Change ... Setting
dialog box opens in the bottom of the window. Available options depend on the feature. The following illustration shows the
Device
Settings
tab.
Figure 43: Device Settings tab
The
Device Settings
tab contains the following controls.
•
Form to Tray Assignment
option
•
Font Substitution Table
•
Available PostScript Memory
option
•
Output Protocol
option
•
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
option
•
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
option
•
Job Timeout
option
•
Wait Timeout
option
•
Minimum Font Size to Download As Outline
option
•
Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap
option
Form to Tray Assignment
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer supports more than one source of paper, with at least three trays on both models and a 2000-sheet tray 4 on the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn. You can assign a form (which defines the paper size and
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PS driver features
129
130
margins) to each of your printer paper sources. When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print. The printer prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.
Font Substitution Table
The
Font Substitution Table
setting shows the font substitution table and presents options for changing TrueType-to-
PostScript font mapping.
Available PostScript Memory
The
Available PostScript Memory
is a subset of the total physical memory of the printer. It is usually best to use the default setting, which is determined by the printer manufacturer.
Driver workspace is reflected in the
Available Postscript Memory
setting of the
Device Settings
tab in the HP traditional PS driver interface.
Output Protocol
The
Output Protocol
setting specifies the protocol that the printer uses for print jobs. The possible settings are:
•
ASCI
. When data is sent in ASCII (7-bit) format, the print job might take longer to print, but it can be sent through any I/O channel, such as a parallel or a network port.
•
Binary
or
TBCP
(tagged binary communications protocol). When data is sent using these settings, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports, and print jobs are faster than jobs sent with the data in ASCII format.
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
The
Send Ctrl-D Before Each Job
setting specifies whether the printer is reset at the beginning of every PS print job.
No
is the default setting. When you use the Ctrl + D command, your printer is reset to its default setting to ensure that the configuration of jobs previously sent to the printer do not affect the current print job settings. Using Ctrl + D may cause a print job to fail if your printer is connected to a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a printer connected through parallel or serial ports, change
No
to
Yes
.
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
The
Send Ctrl-D After Each Job
setting specifies whether the printer is reset at the end of every PS print job.
Yes
is the default setting. When you use the Ctrl + D command, your printer is reset to its default setting to ensure that the configuration of future jobs sent to the printer are not affected by the current print job settings. Using Ctrl + D may cause a print job to fail if your printer is connected to a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change
Yes
to
No
.
Job Timeout
The
Job Timeout
setting specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the printer before the printer stops trying to print the document. If you specify
0 seconds
(the default setting), the printer continues trying to print indefinitely.
Wait Timeout
The
Wait Timeout
setting specifies how long the printer waits to get more PS information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the printer stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very large or complicated document, you might want to increase this value. If you specify
0 seconds
, the printer waits indefinitely.
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This setting specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the PS driver downloads TrueType fonts as outline
(Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum value is downloaded as a bitmap (Type 3) font.
HP traditional PS driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Maximum Font Size to Download as Bitmap
This setting specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the PS driver downloads TrueType fonts as bitmap
(Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum value is downloaded as an outline (Type 1) font.
Note
Installable Options
The items listed under
Installable Options
are printer-specific printing options that you can install for use with your printer. The options for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer are:
•
Tray 4
(2000-sheet tray)
Tray 4 is available for the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn only.
Note
•
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
•
Printer Disk
•
Accessory Output Bins
The default setting is
Not Installed
. For the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn, the following accessory output bins are available:
HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
,
HP 3000-Sheet Stacker
, or
Multifunction Finisher
•
Job Storage
•
Printer Memory
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PS driver features
131
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
When you install your printer using Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the HP PCL 5c, PCL 6, and PS unidrivers are installed.
This section describes the options available on each tab of the HP unidriver PCL 6 and PCL 5c interfaces.
Access to drivers
To gain access to driver settings from within most software programs, click
File
, click
, and then click
Properties
.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs that appear vary, depending on the printer model and the driver.
You can also control the drivers directly from your computer.
•
In Windows 2000, click
Start
, click
Settings
, click
Printers
, right-click the printer name, and then click
Printing
Preferences
or
Document Defaults
(depending on the OS and driver), to gain access to the same set of driver tabs that are controlled by the software program.
•
In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click
Start
, click
Control Panel
, click
Printers and Faxes
(Windows
XP Professional) or
Printers and other hardware devices
(Windows XP Home) to gain access to the same set of driver tabs that are controlled by the software program.
If, after right-clicking the printer name, you click
Properties
, you gain access to a different set of tabs that control the driver and driver connections.
Note
Help system
The HP LaserJet 5c, PCL 6, and PS unidrivers include a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
Bubble Help, which shows driver constraint messages with an "i" icon, is a feature of the the HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers, and is not used by the HP traditional PS driver or the HP PCL 5c, PCL 6, or PS unidrivers.
What's this? Help
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support "What's this?" Help. You can gain access to "What's this?" Help messages in any of the following ways:
•
Press the
Help
button in the lower-right corner of the
Paper/Quality
,
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Destination
, or
Color
tabs for a general Help message that describes the use of the driver tabs.
•
Right-click a control and click
What's this?
, and a pop-up Help window appears.
•
Click the
?
button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the
X
, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. Use this special cursor to select a control, and the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.
•
Press the
F1
key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
Press the
Help
button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, and a context-sensitive Help message appears.
Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages
Incompatible print settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific actions that you take. These messages alert you to the selections that are illogical or impossible given the capabilities of the printer or the current settings of other controls.
In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some technically invalid printdriver configurations can be set without resulting in the appearance of warning messages. Duplexing, for instance, is not possible when the Transparency media type is selected. However, the incompatible print settings message does appear when you try to print with the incompatible settings.
132
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
For PCL 6, clicking the
Resolve all conflicts for me automatically
option button, and then clicking
OK
accepts the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value. If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click the
I will resolve the conflict myself
option button, and then click
OK
.
The following illustration shows an
Incompatible Print Settings
message.
Figure 44: An Incompatible Print Settings message
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
133
Advanced tab features
You can use the
Advanced
tab to change the layout of printed pages. Using this tab, you can select items such as paper size and copies in the driver (although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or through the software program page settings) or special controls that are not commonly used. The following illustration shows the
Advanced
tab.
Figure 45: The default appearance of the Advanced tab
134
The
Advanced
tab contains the following controls.
•
Paper/Output
settings
•
Graphic
settings
•
Document Options
settings
Paper/Output settings
The
Paper/Output
settings contain the following controls.
•
Paper Size
setting
•
Copy Count
setting
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Paper Size
Paper Size
sets the default paper size that the driver uses if the program does not specify a size. This list contains all of the standard printer-supported forms and any user-defined media sizes that the printer supports, as defined through the server properties. The driver uses this setting to highlight the constraints that features have on paper size.
Note
Creating custom paper sizes
To create a custom paper size, click
Start
, click
Settings
, and then click
Printers
. Click the
File
menu, click
Server
Properties
, and then click
Create a New Form
. Specify a name and dimensions for your paper size, and then click
Save Form
. This new paper size is included in any list of paper sizes in the driver tabs and the tabs within the software program. Print dialog boxes within the software program also often have settings that allow you to create custom paper sizes.
The driver allows you to define paper sizes that are not supported by the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer. To prevent this from happening, create custom paper sizes that are within the minimum and maximum paper size dimensions of the input devices. See the "Custom width and height control limits" section of this guide for more information.
Copy Count
This driver setting is useful for software programs that do not provide a copy count.
Collated
The
Collated
check box appears beside the
Copy Count
setting when the
Copy Count
setting is greater than 1.
This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program print dialog box. For instance, when using Microsoft Word, the
Collate
check box in the
dialog box is selected by default, whereas, in the driver, the
Collated
check box in the
Advanced
tab is not selected by default. The software program setting takes precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by default. To obtain uncollated printed output, the
Collate
setting must not be selected in the driver and in the software program. Similarly, the
Collated
check box might be selected in the driver, but if the
Collate
setting is not enabled in the software program, the printed output is uncollated.
Graphic settings
The
Graphic
settings contain the following options.
•
Image Color Management
group box
•
TrueType Font
group box (PS only)
Image Color Management
This option lists the available Image Color Management (ICM) options used for printing color graphics. ICM, a set of calculations for color matching, makes it possible for software programs to adjust colors before printing so that the color of images displayed on the screen more closely match the color of images when printed.
The
Image Color Management
settings contain the following controls.
•
ICM Method
settings
•
ICM Intent
settings
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
135
136
ICM Method
The
ICM Method
setting specifies how to print your color graphics. The following options are available.
•
Disabled
is the default setting.
•
ICM Handled by Host System
causes the calculations for color matching to be performed on the host computer before it sends the document to the printer.
•
ICM Handled by Printer
calculates the color matching on your printer. In this case, a set of rules for mapping the colors is created and downloaded to the printer (which must be PostScript level 2 emulation or higher). The printer uses these rules to adjust colors in the document.
•
ICM Handled by Printer using printer calibration
(available on the PS driver only) calculates the color matching on your printer. In this case, the set of rules for mapping the colors is already downloaded to the printer (which must be PostScript level 2 emulation or higher), so it is not created or downloaded again.
ICM Intent
This control specifies how color images are created to produce the best looking image on the printed page.
The following options are available.
•
Graphics
is the best setting to use if you are printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors.
•
Pictures
is the default setting. Use this setting to maximize the contrast for photographs or pictures where the colors blend together.
•
Proof
is the setting to use if your document uses a color that you need to match exactly, and you are sending the document to a printer that has that specific color of ink.
•
Match
allows you to preview the color settings from another printer.
TrueType Font (PS only)
This control specifies the TrueType font options for the PS unidriver. The following options are available.
•
Substitute with Device Font
, which is the default setting, causes the printer to use equivalent printer fonts for printing documents that contain TrueType fonts. This permits faster printing; however, you might lose special characters not supported by the printer font.
•
Download as Softfont
downloads TrueType fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts.
Document Options
The
Document Options
settings contain the following controls.
•
Advanced Printing Features
•
Color Printing Mode (PCL 6 and PCL 5c only)
•
Print Optimizations (PCL 6 and PCL 5c only)
•
PostScript Options (PS only)
•
Printer Features
•
Layout Options
Advanced Printing Features
When the
Advanced Printing Features
setting is
Enabled
, metafile spooling is turned on and
Finishing
-tab options such as
Page Order
,
Booklet Layout
, and
Pages per Sheet
are available, depending on your printer. For normal printing, leave the
Advanced Printing Features
setting at the default (
Enabled
). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. When disabled, metafile spooling is turned off and the printing options might be unavailable.
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Color Printing Mode (PCL 6 and PCL 5c only)
The
Color Printing Mode
specifies whether to print in color or black and white. The color option is
True Color (24 bpp)
, which is the default setting. Use the black and white option,
Monochrome
, to sharpen details in graphics or to speed up the printing of your color document.
Print Optimizations
The default setting for
Print Optimizations
is
Enabled
. When this feature is enabled and your document contains overlapping text and graphics, text placed on top of a graphic might not print correctly. If the printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When disabled, print optimization features, such as substituting device fonts for
TrueType fonts and scanning for horizontal and vertical rules, are turned off.
PostScript Options (PS only)
The following
PostScript Options
are available.
•
PostScript Output Option
•
TrueType Font Download Option
•
PostScript Language Level
•
Send PostScript Error Handler
•
Mirrored Output
PostScript Output Option
The
PostScript Output Option
specifies the output format for PS files. Generally, you use the default setting,
Optimize for Speed
, to print your documents. To create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring
Conventions (ADSC), click
Optimize for Portability
. Each page of the document will be a self-contained object. This is useful if you want to create a PS file and print it on a different printer. If you want to include the file as an image in another document that that is printed from a different software program, click
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)
.
Archive Format
creates a PS file you can use later.
TrueType Font Download Option
The
TrueType Font Download Option
specifies how TrueType fonts are downloaded.
Automatic
, which is the default setting, allows the PS driver to decide which format is best. If you want to download the TrueType font as a scalable outline font, click
Outline
. To download the TrueType font as a bitmap font, click
Bitmap
. If your printer is a
TrueType rasterizer printer, click
Native TrueType
to download the TrueType font as an outline font.
PostScript Language Level
The
PostScript Language Level
option specifies which PS language level to use, from
1
to
3
, the highest level supported by your printer. The default setting is
3
. Some printers support multiple levels.
It is usually best to select the highest number available, because a higher language level provides more features. In some instances, you should use level 1. For example, if you are printing a file to disk, and that file will be printed by someone with a level 1 printer, you need to select level 1.
Send PostScript Error Handler
The
Send PostScript Error Handler
setting specifies whether a PS error handler message is sent. If you want the printer to print an error page when an error occurs in the print job, click
Yes
.
Yes
is the default setting.
Mirrored Output
This control specifies mirrored output. Click
Yes
to print a mirror image of your document by reversing the horizontal coordinates.
No
is the default setting.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
137
Printer Features
The following
Printer Features
are available.
•
Print All Text as Black
•
Send True Type as Bitmap (PCL 6 and PCL 5c only)
•
Graphics Mode (PCL 5c only)
•
Print on Backside
Print All Text as Black
The
Print All Text as Black
feature is
Disabled
by default. When
Enabled
, this option causes the driver to print all text as black regardless of the original document text color. By design, white text remains white as a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background. This setting does not affect graphic images on the page.
Print all
Text as Black
remains enabled only for the current print job. When the current print job is completed,
Print all Text as Black
is automatically disabled.
Send TrueType as Bitmap (PCL 6 and PCL 5c only)
Send TrueType as Bitmap:
provides an alternative for those software programs that have trouble dealing with
TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting is
Disabled
(off) by default. The TrueType fonts are first converted to bitmap soft fonts prior to downloading. The
Enabled
setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.
On PCL 5c drivers, the
Send TrueType as Bitmap:
setting is not available when the
Send Page as Raster
option is selected.
Graphics Mode (PCL 5c only)
Two settings under
Graphics Mode
(on the HP PCL 5c unidriver only) control the way in which the driver expresses vector graphics on a page:
•
Select
Send Graphics as Vector
to send graphics to the printer as a combination of HP-GL/2 and raster images.
This setting might produce higher-quality graphics output.
•
Select
Send Graphics as Raster
to send all graphics to the printer as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed.
Print on Backside
The default setting for
Print on Backside
is
Off
. Select
On
when you are printing on the second side of the paper.
This reduces the paper curl that can occur when paper is printed on twice.
Note
Layout Options
The following
Layout Options
are available.
•
Orientation
•
Page Order
Orientation
Orientation
refers to the layout of the image on the page. It does not affect in any way the manner in which the media is fed into the printer. The default orientation is
Portrait
. The other setting is
Landscape
.
Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
138
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Page Order
Page Order
specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed.
Front to Back
prints the document so that page 1 prints first.
Back to Front
prints the document so that page 1 prints last. The
Back to Front
setting is useful if you are printing to a face-up output bin to achieve output in the correct order.
The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of paper rather than on individual logical pages. Accordingly, if you set
N-up
to be greater than one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of paper does not change.
Paper/Quality tab features
Use the
Paper/Quality
tab to specify the type and source of your print media, as well as print-quality settings. You can also indicate paper selection choices for the first page of the document that are different from the choices for the other pages. The
Paper/Quality
tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 46: The default appearance of the Paper/Quality tab
The
Paper/Quality
tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets
group box
•
Paper Options
group box
•
Document preview image
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
139
Print Task Quick Sets
Print Task Quick Sets
is a feature that is available on the
Paper/Quality
,
Finishing
,
Effects
, and
Destination
tabs.
The feature is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all of the other tabs.
Task Quick Sets
are either preset or user-defined printing specifications (such as paper size, pages per sheet, and so on).
The following settings are available in the
Print Task Quick Sets
drop-down menu.
•
Default Print Settings
•
Booklet on 11x17
•
Booklet on A3
•
Booklet on A4
•
Booklet on Letter
•
User Guide Print Settings
An illustration of the available Print Task Quick Sets appears below.
Figure 47: The Print Task Quick Sets
140
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Default Print Settings
When you select
Default Print Settings
, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom paper sizes, or the
User Guide Print Settings
quick set have been changed or deleted, the original settings are not restored.
The
Type new Quick Set name here
setting (which has the same settings as
Default Print Settings
) appears automatically if no other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed. Otherwise, the setting in the
Print Task Quick Sets
menu has the same label that appeared when you last closed the printing
Properties
dialog box by clicking
OK
.
The following table shows the default settings for
Print Task Quick Sets
. See the "HP driver preconfiguration" section of this guide for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
Table 20: Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP LaserJet 9500 printer
Driver feature
Print on both sides
Flip pages up
Booklet printing
Pages per sheet
Print page border
Page order
Print quality
Current setting
Off
Off
Off
1
U.S. English Print Task
Quick Sets default values
Off
Right, then down
Best quality
PCL 6: This is the "Faster
Printing" setting
Other language default setting (if different)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Preconfigurable
1
Rendering mode (PCL 5c only)
Scale patterns
(WYSIWYG)
Size to print on
PCL 5c: This is the "Best
Quality" setting
Automatic
On
Print text as black Off
TrueType (TM) as bitmaps Off - send TrueType fonts
Print document on as outlines
Off - print on the size specified in the
Paper
tab
Letter
On (in Thai only)
Default value depends on regional paper size
No
Yes
Yes
Yes (except in Thai)
Yes
Yes
Scale to fit
% of normal size
Watermarks
Watermarks first page only
Current watermarks
Off
100
(none)
Off
Watermark message
Watermark message angle
Watermark message
(none), Confidential,
Draft, SAMPLE
(none)
Diagonal
52 custom angle
Watermark font name
Watermark font color
Arial (R)
Gray
Watermark font shading Very Light
Language dependent
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
141
Copies
Driver feature
Watermark font size
Watermark font style
Mini pages tab
Use different paper for first page
All pages and first page size is
All pages and first page source is
All pages and first page type is
Other pages source is
Other pages type is
Back cover
Back cover source is
Back cover type is
Paper size units
Destination features
Job storage mode
Job storage require PIN to print
Job storage user name
Job storage job name
Job storage PIN to print
Output bin
Output bin option
Orientation
Rotate by 180 degrees
U.S. English Print Task
Quick Sets default values
140
Regular
All pages
Off - all of the pages use the same paper
Letter
Auto Select
Unspecified
Auto Select
Unspecified
No back cover
Auto Select
Unspecified
Custom paper size width 8.50 inches
Custom paper size height 11.0 inches
Inches
Job Storage
Off
Off
User logon name <blank user must specify>
<blank - user must specify>
0000
Top bin (face-down)
(none)
1
Portrait
Off
Other language default setting (if different)
Default value depends on regional paper size
210 mm
297 mm
Millimeters
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1- Preconfigurable by using an HP Preconfiguration tool. For more information, go to:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj9500
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Preconfigurable
1
User guide print settings
The
User Guide Print Settings
setting provides a
Print Task Quick Set
for optimal printing of the
User Reference
Guide
for the HP Color LaserJet 9500.
Type new Quick Set name here
When you change any of the default settings on the
Finishing
tab or any of the other tabs, the name in the
Print Task
Quick Sets
drop-down menu dynamically changes to
Type new Quick Set name here
. If you want to save this configuration as a print task quick set, highlight the word
Type new Quick Set name here
, type the name you want for your new print task quick set and click
Save
. Print task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a print task quick set, select it from the drop-down menu and click
Delete
.
142
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
You can store a maximum of 25 user-defined print task quick sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Quick Sets defined. Please delete some before adding new ones."
Paper options
The following settings are available in the
Paper Options
group box:
•
Use different paper
•
Source is:
•
Type is:
Use different paper
When you click the
Use different paper
check box, the following options become available.
•
First Page
•
Other Pages
•
Back Cover
First Page and Other Pages
A cover can have two forms, depending on the type of booklet or book a user is printing:
•
For full-size (for example, Letter size, Letter type) books, select a different media for the first page and add an extra blank back page. The front cover can contain print or be a blank page, and can either be pulled from a different paper source or be of another media type. The back cover can be printed on a different media from the front cover.
•
For two-page-per-sheet (2-up) booklet printing, obtain a cover by selecting a different media for the first page only.
The back cover setting is hidden, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
Whenever you make changes to all of the pages (that is, when
Use different paper
is not selected), these changes are reflected in both the
First Page
and
Other Pages
settings.
Use the
Other Pages
option to select an alternative media type or source for the pages that follow the first page of a document. The choices and defaults for
Source is:
and
Type is:
are the same as they are for
First Page
.
Back cover
Use the
Back Cover
option to select an alternate paper source or media type from which a blank page is drawn and placed after the last page of the document. By default, no back cover is printed.
The settings for
Back Cover
are not retained when the
Use different paper
check box is cleared. If you select
Use different paper
, and then select
Back Cover
, the
Add a blank back cover
check box appears. When you clear the
Use different paper
check box, the source and media type for the first tab overwrites the other paper settings, and the
Add a blank back cover
check box is cleared, and then the option disappears. The setting for
Source is:
is set to
Automatically Select
, and the setting for
Type is:
is
Unspecified
.
Source is
The
Source Is:
setting specifies the paper source to use for printing a document. The drop-down menu shows the input trays available according to the
Device Settings
tab.
The following options are available.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
143
Note
•
Automatically Select
•
Manual Feed (Tray 1)
•
Printer Auto Select
(PCL 6 and PCL 5c only)
•
Tray 1
•
Tray 2
(500-sheet tray)
•
Tray 3
(500-sheet tray)
•
Tray 4
(2000-sheet tray) - HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn only
Automatically Select
and
Printer Auto Select
both cause the printer to use the default input tray. However,
Printer Auto Select
sends no input tray information to the printer, while
Automatically Select
allows you to select a tray that is configured in
Form to Tray Assignment
.
The default setting is
Automatically Select
. When this setting is selected, the printer uses the paper tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a paper source other than
Automatically Select
, make sure that the correct paper size is loaded in the paper source.
If a conflict exists among paper source, size, and type, and you choose to keep the conflicting settings, the settings are processed in the following order: paper size, paper type, and then paper source.
For information about media sizes and types, see the “Media attributes” section of this guide.
Type is
The
Type is:
drop-down menu shows all of the the media types supported by the printer, as well as any user-defined types that have been created by a network administrator using Web JetAdmin. When you use the default setting,
Unspecified
, the printer uses the default media type, usually
Plain
.
No mechanism exists for manually adding custom paper types from the driver. Custom types can only be added with the bidirectional-communication mechanism, and they must already exist in the printer when the bidirectionalcommunication query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, the information that is returned is used to update the list of paper types. If bidirectional communication is disabled, the driver looks for any custom paper types that it might have saved from a previous bidirectional communication query and use those. Otherwise, no custom paper types are available through the driver.
144
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
The following standard types appear in the lists:
• Bond
•
Cardstock (> 164 g/m
2
)
• Color
•
Glossy (75 - 105 g/m
2
)
• Envelope
•
Heavy (106 - 163 g/m
2
)
• HP Heavy Glossy
• Labels
• Letterhead
•
Light (< 75 g/m
2
)
•
Non-HP Heavy Glossy
•
Plain
•
Preprinted
•
Prepunched
•
Recycled
•
Tough Paper
•
Transparency
•
Unspecified
Document preview image
The preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side up. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the
Paper/Quality
,
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Destination
, and
Color
tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the preview image. When you move the mouse over the preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image. The light-yellow dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes. Click on the label to toggle between English and metric units.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
145
Finishing tab features
The appearance of the
Finishing
tab differs, depending on the printer model and the installed paper-handling accessories. The following illustration shows the default appearance of the
Finishing
tab.
Figure 48: The default appearance of the Finishing tab
146
The
Finishing
tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets
group box
•
Document Options
group box
• Document preview image
•
Stapling Options
group box (activated when the
Accessory Output Bin
setting on the
Device Settings
tab is set to any option other than
Not Installed
)
•
Rotate by 180 degrees
group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The
Print Task Quick Sets
control is available on the
Paper/Quality
,
Finishing
,
Effects
, and
Destination
tabs. The feature is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all of the other tabs.
Print Task
Quick Sets
are either preset or user-defined printing specifications (such as paper size, pages per sheet, and so on).
For more information, see the "Print/Quality tab features" section of this guide.
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Document Options
The
Document Options
group box contains the following controls.
•
Print on Both Sides
•
Flip Pages Up
(available when the
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
setting on the
Device Settings
tab is
Installed
)
•
Booklet Layout
(available when the
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
setting on the
Device Settings
tab is
Installed
)
•
Pages per Sheet
•
Print Page Borders
(activated when
Pages per Sheet
setting is greater than 1)
•
Page Order
(activated when the
Pages per Sheet
setting is greater than 1)
Note
Print on Both Sides option
The
Print on Both Sides
option is available only if the printer has a duplexing unit installed. The
HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn comes with a duplexing unit already installed. The duplexing unit is an optional accessory for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n.
In addition to having a duplexing unit installed, it must be correctly configured in the printer driver in order to use the
Print on Both Sides
option. To configure the duplexing unit, click
Start
on the Windows task bar, click
Settings
, and then click
Printers
. Right-click on the printer name, and then click
Properties
. Click the
Device
Settings
tab, and click the
Duplex Unit
drop-down menu and select
Enabled
. Then click
Apply
, and close the driver window.
The default setting for the
Print on Both Sides
option is off (not selected). Although the
Print on Both Sides
check box is always available, if you select
Print on Both Sides
along with incompatible settings, an
Incompatible Print
Settings
message appears. See the "Incompatible Print Settings" section of this guide for more information.
An
Incompatible Print Settings
message appears if you select
Print on Both Sides
along with any of the following settings.
On the
Paper/Quality
tab
•
Transparency
•
Labels
•
Envelope
On the
Advanced tab
under
Paper Size
•
Double PostCard (JIS)
•
Envelope #10
•
Envelope B5
•
Envelope C5
•
Envelope DL
•
Envelope Monarch
Automatically printing on both sides
Use the duplexing unit in the printer to automatically print on two sides of the paper when that option is specified in the job . The HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn comes with a duplexing unit installed. The duplexing unit is an optional accessory for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of printer
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
147
settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode is associated with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.
Flip Pages Up
The
Flip Pages Up
check box, enabled only when
Print on Both Sides
is selected, is used to specify the duplexbinding option. By default, the
Flip Pages Up
check box is not selected. The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the paper orientation selected on the
Basics
tab.
Table 21: Page orientation
Orientation (Basics tab)
Portrait
Landscape
Flip Pages Up selected
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Flip Pages Up not selected
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When
Print on Both Sides
is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing will occur on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
Booklet layout
The
Booklet Layout
drop-down menu, visible when
Print on Both Sides
is selected, offers choices that are based on the current paper size. The default setting for the
Booklet Layout
drop-down menu is
Off
.
•
Left Edge Binding
•
Right Edge Binding
When you select
Left Edge Binding
or
Right Edge Binding
, the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding, and, if the
Pages per Sheet
setting is on the default setting of 1, it automatically changes to 2.
You may change the
Pages per Sheet
setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16. See "Pages per Sheet" in the "HP traditional
PCL 5c, PCL 6, and PS unidriver features" section of this document for more information.
Book and booklet printing
Book and booklet printing are both supported by the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer.
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type for the first page (front cover) or last page (back cover). Use the
First Page
and
Back Cover
options on the
Paper/Quality
tab (available when you select the
Use different paper for first page
check box) to select different media for the first and last pages.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type. Use the
Booklet Layout
drop-down menu on the
Finishing
tab to control booklet settings.
Printing a Booklet using Booklet Layout
1. In your software program, click
File
, click
, and then click
Properties
.
2. Click the
Finishing
tab. Click the
Print on Both Sides
check box to select it.
3. In the
Booklet Layout
drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The booklet printing type consists of the location of the binding (for example,
Left Edge Binding
).
148
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Printing a book using Booklet Layout
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type of the first page (front cover) or the last page (back cover). The booklet cover must be the same size as the inside sheets. Follow these instructions for book printing.
1. In your software program, click
File
, click
, and then click
Properties
.
2. Click the
Paper/Quality
tab, and then click the
Use different paper
check box to select it.
3. Click the
First Page
option. On the
Source is:
and
Type is:
menus, select the source and type settings for your cover.
4. Click the
Other Pages
option. On the
Source is:
and
Type is:
menus, select the source and type settings for the inside sheets of your print job.
5. Click the
Back Cover
option. The
Add a blank back cover
check box appears. If you select this check box, the
Source Is:
and
Type Is:
menus appear. Select the source and type settings for the back cover.
Whenever you make changes to all of the pages (that is, when
Use different paper
is not selected), these changes are reflected in both the
First Page
and
Other Pages
settings whenever you set
Use different paper
.
The
Back Cover
option is not available when you select any
Booklet Layout
setting except
Off
, which is the default. When you use this feature, the last page of the print job is folded into the middle of the booklet.
Pages per Sheet
The
Pages per Sheet
drop-down menu provides six settings: 1 (default), 2, 4, 6, 9 and 16.
Related controls indented beneath the
Pages per Sheet
edit box are
Print Page Borders
and
Page Order
, which become active when the
Pages Per Sheet
setting is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders
When you select the
Print Page Borders
check box, a line is set around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The
Page Order
drop-down menu contains four selections:
•
Right, then Down
•
Down, then Right
•
Left, then Down
•
Down, then Left
The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following illustration.
Figure 49: Page-order preview images
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
149
150
•
2 pages per sheet
•
4 pages per sheet
•
6 pages per sheet
•
9 pages per sheet
•
16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the
Paper/Quality
,
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Destination
, and
Color
tabs. For more information about the document preview image, see the "Paper/Quality tab features" section of this document.
Stapling options
Use this setting to select the type of stapling options to apply to your document. The
Stapling
options are only available when the Accessory Output Bin installed on your printer has a stapler (for example, the HP 3000-Sheet
Stapler/Stacker or the HP Multifunction Finisher). The specific
Stapling
options available are dependent upon which
Accessory Output Bin is installed.
The following
Stapling
options are available.
•
None
(default)
•
One Staple
•
One Staple Angled
(HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker only)
•
Two Staples
•
Three Staples
(HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker only)
•
Six Staples
(HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker only)
•
Fold/saddle stitch
(HP Multifunction Finisher only)
Use the following guidelines when stapling.
• Each stapler has a maximum number of pages that can be stapled. Consult your stapler documentation to find out your stapler limitations.
•
One Staple Angled
will not work with some paper sizes; in these cases
One Staple
is used.
• If you have selected more than one staple per page and you are printing on both sides, you will not be able to flip your pages up, or to the left or right, depending on which edge of the paper the staples are placed.
•
When selecting a stapling option, pages will always be printed to the
Stapler Bin
on the printer.
•
For some paper sizes, the printer may assume a specific paper feed orientation (that is, which edge goes into the printer first). If you encounter unexpected results in staple placement, try using a different feed orientation. For example, find a paper tray on your printer where you can insert letter paper with the short edge towards the printer rather than the long edge.
•
You might want to avoid some staple positions. For example, if you are printing on both sides of the paper and want to flip your pages up, you should not select more than one staple if the paper is fed from the long edge.
Using two or more staples prevents you from flipping the paper up.
•
If your stapler head cannot move, then there are some corners on the paper that staples cannot be placed. For portrait orientation, a staple can be placed only on the upper-left or the lower-right corners. For landscape orientation, a staple can be placed only on the lower-left or upper-right corners.
Rotate by 180 degrees
This feature causes the driver to rotate all of the page images by 180 degrees. The purpose of this feature is to provide more control over the binding edge and for controlling the image on special media. For example, a printer
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
might not fuse toner correctly near the trailing edge of an envelope. To correct this problem, rotate the media 180 degrees in the paper tray and select the
Rotate by 180 degrees
check box.
Effects tab features
The
Effects
tab is used to create unique paper effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following illustration shows the
Effects
tab.
Figure 50: Effects tab
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
151
The
Effects
tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets
group box
•
Resizing Options
group box
•
Document preview image
•
Watermarks
group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The
Print Task Quick Sets
control is available on the
Paper/Quality
,
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Destination
, and
Color
tabs. The feature is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all of the other tabs. The print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet.
For more information, see the "Paper/Quality tab features" section of this guide.
Resizing Options
The Resizing Options group box contains the following controls.
•
Print Document on
setting
•
Scale to Fit
check box
•
% of Normal Size
setting
Print Document On setting
Use
Print Document On
to format the document for one paper size, and then print the document on a different paper size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new paper size.
You can disable the
Print Document On
control by creating of the following conditions:
•
Percent of Normal Size
is not 100.
•
Pages per Sheet
(on the
Finishing
tab) is not 1.
When
Print Document On
is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes supported by the selected media source, and any of the custom sizes that you have created (if the currently selected media source is manual, auto, or any tray). When
Print Document On
is selected,
Scale to Fit
is automatically selected.
152
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Scale to Fit option
The
Scale to Fit
option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target paper size.
By default,
Scale to Fit
is selected when
Print Document On
is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images are not scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target paper. If the document size is larger than the target paper size, then the document image is clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target paper. The following illustration shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal paper with the
Print Document On
option selected, and the target size specified as
Letter.
Figure 51: Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size option
The
% of Normal Size
option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100 percent of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the paper size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the paper size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25 percent to 400 percent, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab
key is pressed or another control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator is dragged, and the preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by one percent. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10 percent.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows resolution; use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the desired value, and then use the scroll bar arrows to refine the value.
The following settings disable
% of Normal Size
:
•
Print Document On
is selected.
•
Pages per Sheet
is not 1.
Watermarks
The
Watermarks
group box contains the following controls.
•
Watermarks
drop-down menu
•
First Page Only
check box
•
Edit
button (Opens the
Watermark Details
dialog box)
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
153
Watermarks drop-down menu
Use the
Watermarks
settings to choose a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or to edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
•
(none)
•
Confidential
•
Draft
•
SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark selected from this list appears in the preview image.
First Page Only option
When
First Page Only
is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The
First Page
Only
check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when
Pages per Sheet
is set to "4" and
First Page Only
is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
154
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Edit button (Watermark Details)
Click
Edit,
and the
Watermark Details
dialog box appears. The following illustration shows the
Watermark Details
dialog box.
Figure 52: Watermark Details
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
155
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and the font attributes.
Click
OK
to accept all of the changes made in the
Watermark Details
dialog box. Clicking
Cancel
does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark, and then select a different watermark or click
New
, all of the changes made to the previous watermark are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
The
Watermark Details
dialog box contains the following controls.
•
Current Watermarks
group box
•
Watermark Message
text box
•
Message Angle
group box
•
Font Attributes
group box
Note
Current Watermarks
The
Current Watermarks
group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks made available in the driver and any new watermarks you have created. To create a new watermark, click
New
. The new watermark appears in the
Current Watermarks
list and in the
Watermark Message
edit box as
Untitled
until you name it. To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the
Watermark Message
edit box. To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the
Current Watermarks
list and click
Delete
.
You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the
Current Watermarks
list at one time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the
New
button is disabled, and a Bubble Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to enable it.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the
Current Watermarks
list. If you change the
Watermark
Message
for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The
Watermark Message
is also the name that identifies the watermark in the
Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different font or size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example,
Draft #2
). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique.
Message Angle
Use the controls in the
Message Angle
group box to print the watermark in a diagonal, horizontal, or angle (custom) orientation to the text on the page. The default is
Diagonal
. All three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement.
Diagonal
places the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
Document preview image
The preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the
Paper/Quality
,
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Destination
, and
Color
tabs. For more information about the document preview image, see the "Paper/Quality tab features" section of this document.
156
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the
Font Attributes
group box to change the font and the color, shading, size, and style of the font.
The
Font Attributes
group box contains the following controls.
•
Name
drop-down menu
•
Color
drop-down menu
•
Shading
drop-down menu
•
Size
spin box
•
Style
drop-down menu
Name
The
Name
drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is languagedependent.
Color
The
Color
drop-down menu lists the fixed, unalterable color choices for the watermark. The default setting for new and preset watermarks is
Gray
.
Color
options are the following:
•
Gray
•
Red
•
Yellow
•
Green
•
Cyan
•
Blue
•
Magenta
Shading
The default
Shading
setting for new and preset watermarks is
Very Light
. The following range of shades is available from the
Shading
drop-down menu.
•
Lightest
•
Very Light
(default)
•
Light
•
Medium Light
•
Medium
•
Medium Dark
•
Dark
•
Very Dark
•
Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the color selected in the
Color
attribute setting.
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the
Size
menu. The default point size for new watermarks is
80
points. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
157
Style
The choice of
Regular
,
Bold
,
Italic
, and
Bold Italic
is available from the
Style
drop-down menu. The default
Style
setting for new and preset watermarks is
Regular
.
Destination tab features
The
Destination
tab provides options for job storage and output bins. The
Destination
tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 53: Destination tab features
158
The
Destination
tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets
group box (Standard for the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer; optional for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer)
•
Destination Features
group box
•
Output Bin Options
group box
• Document preview image
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Print Task Quick Sets
The
Print Task Quick Sets
control is available on the
Paper/Quality
,
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Destination
, and
Color
tabs. The feature is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all of the other tabs.
Task Quick Sets
are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the "Paper/Quality tab features" section of this guide.
Note
Destination Features group box
To see the
Destination Features
group box to use the
Job Storage
options, the printer must have a hard disk installed. A printer hard disk is an optional feature for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer and a standard feature of the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer. In addition to having a hard disk installed, the printer must also have the
Printer Hard Disk
option set to
Installed
in the
Installable Options
section of the
Device Settings
tab.
The
Destination Features
group box contains a drop-down menu that contains only the
Job Storage
option and a
Settings
button that opens the
Job Storage Settings
dialog box .
The following illustration shows the
Job Storage Settings
dialog box.
Figure 54: Job Storage Settings dialog box
The
Job Storage Settings
dialog box contains the following controls.
•
Job Storage Mode
group box
•
Job Notification Options
group box
•
User Name
group box
•
Job Name
group box
•
PIN
group box
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
159
160
Job Storage Mode
Using the
Job Storage
feature on your HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer, you can store documents at the printer, and then control their printing at the printer control panel. This feature is intended to provide greater flexibility, convenience, security, and cost savings.
Off
After the
Job Storage
feature has been enabled, you can use its features by clicking
Settings
on the
Destination
tab of the printer driver.
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer offers the following
Job Storage
options:
•
Off
•
Proof and Hold
•
Private Job
•
Quick Copy
•
Stored Job
The
Off
option turns the
Job Storage
feature off (disables the feature), which means the print job is not stored in the printer.
Proof and Hold
The
Proof and Hold
option stores the print job and prints only the first copy of the job, allowing you to check the first copy. If the document prints correctly, you can print the remaining copies of the print job by using the printer control panel. You can set the number of proof-and-hold print jobs that can be stored in the printer at the printer control panel.
After the proof-and-hold print job is released for printing, it is immediately deleted from the printer. If more copies are needed, you must reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second proof-and-hold job to the printer with the same user name and job name as an existing proof-and-hold job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job overwrites the existing job. Proof-and-hold jobs are deleted if you disconnect the power to the printer.
Private Job
Us the
Private Job
option to send a print job directly to the printer memory. Selecting the
Private Job
option activates the
PIN
field. The print job can be printed only after you type a PIN in the printer control panel. After the job is printed, the printer removes the job from the printer memory. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing.
Private Job
stores the print job in the printer RAM memory.
After the private job is released for printing, it is immediately deleted from the printer. If more copies are needed, you have to reprint the job from the software program. If you send a second private job to the printer with the same user name and job name as an existing private job (and you have not released the original job for printing), the job overwrites the existing job, regardless of the PIN. Private jobs are deleted if you disconnect the power to the printer.
Using a PIN for Private Job
You can secure the
Private Job
option by using a four-digit personal identification number (PIN). This number must be typed in the printer control panel before the printer prints the job. You can choose a predefined PIN, or you can also create a custom PIN.
The box labeled PIN is usually inactive. Selecting
Private Job
along with
Require PIN to Print
activates the
PIN to print:
box. The Private Job/PIN coupling has a PIN restriction of four ASCII numeric characters (ASCII 0-30 through 0-
39). If you enter non-numeric characters, they are removed immediately. If you enter more than four characters, the characters past the fourth are truncated. The field temporarily allows fewer than four digits in the string, but when the edit field loses focus, the zeroes pad the left end until there are exactly four digits. The default initialized value for the
PIN is 0000 for
Private Job
with
Require PIN to Print
selected.
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Quick Copy
When you select
Quick Copy
option, a copy of the print job is stored on the hard disk, after which you can print additional copies of a print job by using the control panel. The number of quick-copy print jobs that can be stored in the printer is set from the printer control panel.
The printer configuration can be set to hold a maximum of 50 quick-copy or proof-and-hold jobs. The number is set at the printer control panel in the
Configuration
menu, and the default is 32. When this preset limit is reached, a newer document overwrites the oldest document. Also, a document that has the same user and job name as one that is already stored on the hard disk overwrites the existing document. Quick Copy jobs are deleted if the power to the printer is removed.
Stored Job
Use the
Stored Job
option to send a print job directly to the printer hard disk. The print job is stored in the printer as if the printer is an electronic file cabinet. After the print job is stored in the printer hard disk, you can print the job by using the printer control panel.
The job remains stored on the printer until it is deleted or overwritten by a document with the same user and job names. Stored jobs remain on the printer hard disk when power is interrupted. Use this feature for forms and other common or shared documents.
Note
Require PIN to Print option
A stored job can be managed in two ways: as either a private or a public job. Use a private stored job to send a print job directly to the printer memory, which can then be printed only after you type in a PIN at the printer control panel.
(You can set the PIN in the
dialog box.) After the job is printed, the job remains in the printer memory and can be printed again by using the printer control panel. This feature is useful when you are printing sensitive or confidential documents that you do not want to leave in an output bin after printing. Private mode is initiated by clicking the
Require PIN to Print
check box. In this mode, a PIN typed at the control panel is required to release the job.
The box labeled
PIN
is usually inactive. The
Require PIN to Print
option is activated if you click
Stored Job
. If selected, you must enter a PIN to make the stored job private.
A
Stored Job
that has been made private is not the same as a
Private Job
. The
Private Jobs
are deleted from the printer memory after they are printed. The
Stored Jobs
that have been made private are retained in the printer memory after printing, but they require that you type in a PIN each time you want to print a private
Stored
Job
.
Job Notification Options
The only control that appears in the
Job Notification Options
group box is the
Display Job ID When Printing
check box, which is selected by default. Selecting this option causes your document to be identified in the printer control panel by user name and job name when you print using a
Job Storage
feature. Click the
Display Job ID When
Printing
check box to clear it if you do not want the user name and job name to appear in the printer control panel.
Job ID restrictions
The
Job Name
and the
User Name
fields can contain no more than 16 characters each, and are limited to A through
Z and 0 through 9, because the name is displayed on the printer control panel. If you try to enter a lowercase character, it automatically shifts to uppercase. If you try to enter a character with an ASCII code of less than 32 or greater than 126 characters, the character is removed from the edit field, along with all of the characters that follow it.
If you try to enter more than 16 characters, any character beyond 16 is truncated.
When the dialog box is closed, or as soon as the focus is removed from the edit box (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected), an empty string is replaced with “Untitled”. In those languages for which
“Untitled” cannot be translated without the use of invalid characters, the driver uses a string of three dashes. The acceptable characters for
Job Name
and
User Name
vary for each operating system. The string must meet requirements to be able to appear on the printer control panel display.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
161
User Name group box
The
User Name
group box allows you to identify the job at the printer control panel. The
User Name
group box contains the following options.
•
Windows User Name
option button (default)
•
Custom
option button and text box
Windows User Name
The driver uses your
Windows User Name
by default to identify any print jobs that use a Job Storage mode. If you want to use a different user name, click the
Custom
option button.
Custom
Your
Windows User Name
appears by default in the
Custom
text box when the
Windows User Name
option button is selected. If you wish to use a different user name, click the
Custom
option button, and type your user name into the text box. Take note of the restrictions for user names that are described in the "Job ID restrictions" section of this guide when you are choosing your user name.
Note
Job Name group box
The
Job Name
field is used for specifying a name to identify the job on the printer control panel. The
Job Name
group box contains the following options.
•
Automatic
option button
•
Custom
option button and text box
Automatic option button
The driver automatically assigns a job name to your print job. The job name that is automatically assigned by the driver is the file name of your document if it is available to the driver. If the file name is not available, the job name that is automatically assigned by the driver is a time stamp or the name of the software program from which you are printing. If you want to use a different job name, click the
Custom
option button.
Custom option button and text box
The text string
Automatic
appears in the
Custom Job Name
text box by default when you select the
Automatic
option button. If you want to assign your own job name to your print job, click the
Custom Job Name
option button and type your job name into the text box. Take note of the restrictions for job names described in the "Job ID restrictions" section of this guide when you choose your job name.
Using Job Storage options when printing
You can use
Job Storage
options in the
Destination
tab of the printer driver.
To use the
Job Storage
feature, your printer must have a hard disk installed. The HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn comes with a hard disk. The hard disk is an available option for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n.
In addition to having a hard disk installed, the printer driver must be configured to use the
Job Storage
features.
To enable
Job Storage
, click
Start
, click
Settings
, click
Printers
(or
Printers and Faxes
in Windows XP and
Windows Server 2003), and then right-click the printer icon. Click
Properties
, click the
Device Settings
tab, and scroll down to the
Installable Options
section. Select
Enabled
from the
Job Storage Options
drop-down menu.
1. Click
from the software program. The
dialog box appears.
2. Click
Properties
. The
Properties
dialog box appears.
3. Click the
Destination
tab to display the destination options.
4. Click
Job Storage
on the drop-down menu under
Destination Features
.
162
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
5. Click
Settings…
. The
Job Storage Settings
dialog box appears.
6. You can then select one of the
Job Storage
options described above by clicking the appropriate option button.
These instructions are specific to the Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 environments when using the latest available PCL 5c, PCL 6, and PS drivers.
Releasing private jobs stored at the printer
After you send a print job using the
Job Storage
feature, you can release the job to print by using the printer control panel.
1. Press the select button (the one with the check mark) to enter the menus.
2. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to RETRIEVE JOB, and then press the select button.
3. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your job and press the select button.
4. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT. (The PRINT selection might have an icon next to it indicating that the job is locked. If so, type the PIN, and then press the select button.) Press the select button.
Deleting a print job
Sometimes it is necessary to delete a print job from the printer memory. You can do this from the printer control panel.
1. Press the select button (the one with the check mark) to enter the menus.
2. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to RETRIEVE JOB.
3. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to your job name and press the select button.
4. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to DELETE. (The DELETE selection might have an icon next to it indicating that the job is locked. If so, type the PIN number, and then press the select button.)
Document preview image
The preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the
Paper/Quality
,
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Destination
, and
Color
tabs. For more information about the document preview image, see the "Paper/Quality tab features" section of this document.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
163
Color tab features
Use the
Color
tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and half-toning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The
Color
tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 55: Color tab
164
The
Color
tab contains the following controls:
•
Print Task Quick Sets
group box
•
Color Options
group box
• Document preview image
Print Task Quick Sets
The
Print Task Quick Sets
control is available on the
Paper/Quality
,
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Destination
, and
Color
tabs. The feature is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all of the other tabs.
Task Quick Sets
are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the "Paper/Quality tab features" section of this guide.
Color options
Use the
Color Options
group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print job color rendering and print quality. The
Color Options
group box contains the following controls:
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
•
Automatic
option (default)
•
Manual
option
•
Settings
button (that opens the
Color Settings
dialog box)
•
Print in Grayscale
check box
Automatic color settings
Click the
Automatic
option button to use the default coloration settings that automatically tune your color printer output. The HP
Automatic
default color settings provide high-quality output for most color printing needs.
To convert color information to grayscale and print the document in black and white, select the
Print in Grayscale
checkbox.
Manual color settings
To change the default coloration settings, click the
Manual
option button, and then click the
Settings
button. The
Color Settings
dialog box appears. The default settings are shown in the following illustration.
To change the settings, make your selections using the drop-down menus in the
Color Settings
dialog box, and then click
OK
. You are then prompted to save your selections as Custom or manual settings. The following illustration shows the
Manual Color Settings
dialog box.
Figure 56: Manual Color Settings dialog box
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
165
The
Manual Color Settings
dialog box gives you independent control of neutral grays and halftone for three major components:
Text
,
Graphics
, and
Photographs
. The
Manual Color Settings
dialog box contains the following controls for each of these components:
•
Neutral Grays
•
Halftone
•
RGB Color
The
Manual Color Settings
dialog box also provides a
General
color setting group that applies to all color printing.
Neutral Grays
The
Neutral Grays
drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the printer firmware. The options are
Black Only
or
4-Color
. You can adjust the
Neutral Grays
setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs.
•
Black Only.
This option generates neutral colors (grays and blacks) using only black toner, which ensures that neutral colors do not have a color cast.
Black Only
is the default Neutral Grays setting for the
Text
,
Graphics
, and
Photographs
components.
•
4-Color.
This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black.
Note
Halftone
The
Halftone
settings control the selection of a device-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the printer firmware. The
Halftone
options,
Text
and
Detail
, affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can independently adjust halftone settings for text, graphics, and photos.
•
Text.
This option is optimized for the best reproduction of normal to small text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors. Choose this option when the sharp edges of small objects, especially those that contain secondary colors (such as red, green, and blue), are the top priority.
Text
is the default halftone setting for the
Text
component.
•
Detail.
This option is optimized for the best reproduction of images, graphics, and large, solid-filled print ares. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when the color fidelity of large objects is the top priority.
Detail
is the default halftone setting for the
Graphics
and
Photographs
components.
RGB Color
The
RGB Color
settings affect the color treatment for object types and determines how colors are rendered. The options are
Default (sRGB)
,
Device
, and
Vivid
.
•
Default (sRGB).
This option interprets RGB color as standard default RGB color space (sRGB), which is the accepted standard for many software companies and organizations such as Microsoft and the Worldwide Web
Consortium.
Default (sRGB)
is the default RGB color setting for the
Text
,
Graphics
, and
Photographs
components.
•
Device.
This option sets the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render photographs properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the software program in which you are working or in the operating system.
•
Vivid.
This option sets the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones. Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully. This value is recommended for printing business graphics.
If your software program converts text and graphics to raster, the
Photographs
settings also control the
Text
and
Graphics
settings.
166
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
General color setting
The only
General
color setting available is
Edge Control
.
Edge Control
, which determines how edges are rendered, consists of two components:
Adaptive halftoning
and
Trapping
. Adaptive halftoning increases the edge sharpness of text and graphics while maintaining the quality of area fills.
Trapping
reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. The following options are available:
•
Off
, which sets
Trapping
and
Adaptive Halftoning
to
Off
.
•
Light
, which provides minimal
Trapping
.
Adaptive Halftoning
is set to
On
.
•
Normal
, which provides the default
Trapping
setting.
Adaptive Halftoning
is set to
On
.
Normal
is the default setting.
•
Maximum
, which provides the most
Trapping
.
Adaptive Halftoning
is set to
On
.
Document preview image
The preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the
Paper/Quality
,
Finishing
,
Effects
,
Destination
, and
Color
tabs. For more information about the document preview image, see the "Paper/Quality tab features" section of this document.
Note
Device Settings tab features
The
Device Settings
tab can be found in the
Properties
for the printer driver.
To gain access to the printer driver
Properties
, click
Start
on your Window task bar, click
Settings
, and then click
Printers
(for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click
Printers and Faxes
). Right-click the printer name, and then click
Properties
.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
167
The
Device Settings
tab communicates the hardware configuration of the printer to the driver. The
Device Settings
tab appears whenever the driver is opened from the
Printers
folder by selecting and right-clicking the printer, and then clicking
Properties…
for the driver. When the driver is opened from within a software program, the
Device Settings
tab is not visible. When opened from the
Printers
folder, the
Device Settings
tab appears, as shown in the following illustration.
Figure 57: Device Settings tab
168
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Changes made to the
Device Settings
tab are not reflected in the
Printing Preferences
settings until the modified device settings have been applied. For example, the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the
Device Settings
tab, apply the settings, and then re-open
Printing Preferences
.
The
Device Settings
tab contains the following options.
•
Form to Tray Assignment
•
External Fonts
(PCL 6 and PCL 5c only)
•
Font Substitution Table
(PS only)
•
PostScript Device Settings
(PS only)
•
Installable Options
Form to Tray Assignment
A network administrator can use
Form to Tray Assignment
to specify the paper size in each paper tray.
Many printers support more than one source of paper, such as upper and lower trays. You can assign a form (which defines the paper size and margins) to each of your printer paper sources. When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print from your software programs. The printer prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.
The
Form to Tray Assignment
setting allows network administrators to specify, in the driver, the media size that is loaded into each available paper tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that are available in the media-size list on the
Advanced
tab in the
Printing Preferences
driver tabs. This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with paper-mount messages that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the
Form to Tray Assignment
setting include standard trays, high-capacity input trays, configurable sized paper trays (XY trays), and envelope feeders. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate
Installable Options
setting. For example, for the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer, tray 4 is a high-capacity (2000sheet) tray that is listed in both the
Form to Tray Assignment
setting and the
Installable Options
setting. The input trays listed here are also listed as paper sources on the
Paper/Quality
tab.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
169
External Fonts (PCL 6 and PCL 5c only)
The
External Fonts
option allows you to install and remove external fonts for the printer. External fonts can be soft fonts or cartridge fonts.
Clicking the
External Fonts
option causes the
Properties
button to appear. Clicking the
Properties
button opens the
Font DIMM Installer
dialog box, which is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 58: Font DIMM Installer dialog box
170
Installing external fonts
Follow these steps to install external fonts.
1. Click
Start
,
Settings
,
Printers
(
Printers and Faxes
in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003), right-click on the name of the printer, and then click
Properties
.
2. Click the
Device Settings
tab.
3. Click the
External Fonts
setting. The
Properties
button appears.
4. Click the
Properties
button. The
Font DIMM Installer
dialog box appears.
5. Type the name and path of the font metric file in the
Printer Font File Location
text box or click
Browse
to locate the file on your computer. The font file names appear in the
Font(s) to be Added
window.
6. Select the fonts you want to add, and then click
Add
. The fonts are installed and the file names appear in the
Installed Font(s)
window.
7. Click
OK
to close the
Font DIMM Installer
dialog box.
Removing external fonts
1. Click
Start
,
Settings
,
Printers
(
Printers and Faxes
in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003), right-click on the name of the printer, and then click
Properties
.
2. Click the
Device Settings
tab.
3. Click the
External Fonts
setting. The
Properties
button appears.
4. Click the
Properties
button. The
Font DIMM Installer
dialog box appears.
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
5. The external fonts that are installed appear in the
Installed Fonts
window. Select the fonts you want to remove, and then click
Remove
. The fonts are removed.
6. Click
OK
to close the
Font DIMM Installer
dialog box.
Font Substitution Table (PS only)
Clicking this option displays the font substitution table and options for changing the TrueType-to-printer font mapping.
PostScript Device Settings (PS only)
The following controls are available and appear only in the PS driver.
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available PS memory and provides a spin box for changing this value. The available PS memory is a subset of the printer total physical memory. It is usually best to use the default setting, which is determined by your printer manufacturer. The default PS memory setting for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers is 5859 Kb.
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol the printer will use for print jobs. The following options are available:
•
ASCII
(default)
•
TBCP
•
Binary
When you click
ASCII
, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which may take longer to print but can be sent through any
I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port. When you click
TBCP
(Tagged Binary Communications
Protocol), all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
Send Ctrl + D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the printer will be reset at the beginning of every PS document.
No
is the default setting.
Ctrl + D resets the printer to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job.
Ctrl + D might cause a print job to fail if the printer is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a printer connected through parallel or serial ports, change
No
to
Yes
.
Send Ctrl + D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the printer will be reset at the end of every PS document.
Yes
is the default setting.
Ctrl + D resets the printer to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job.
Ctrl + D might cause a print job to fail if the printer is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change
Yes
to
No
.
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray (RGB value) in text to the gray provided by the PS driver. The default setting is
No
.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
171
172
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray (RGB value) in graphics to the gray provided by the PS driver.
The default setting is
No
.
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts
This control specifies whether to augment the device fonts with the Euro character. The default setting is
Yes
.
Job Timeout
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the printer before the printer stops trying to print the document. If you specify
0 seconds
, the printer continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is
0 seconds
. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of
32,767 seconds
.
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the printer waits to get more PS information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the printer stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you may want to increase this value. If you specify
0 seconds
, the printer waits indefinitely.
The default setting is
300 seconds
. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of
32,767 seconds
.
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the PS driver downloads TrueType fonts as outline
(Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type 3) font. This option lets you fine-tune the
Automatic
setting for the
TrueType Font Download
option on the
Advanced
tab in
Printing
Preferences
. The default setting is
100 pixels
. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of
32,767 pixels
.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the PS driver will download TrueType fonts as bitmap
(Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline (Type 1) font. This option lets you fine-tune the
Automatic
setting or override the
Send TrueType as Bitmap
setting for the
TrueType Font
Download
option on the
Advanced
tab in
Printing Preferences
. The default setting is
600 pixels
. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of
32,767 pixels
.
Installable Options
This section allows you to configure the printer-specific printing options that you can install for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers. The following controls are available:
•
Tray 4
(HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn only)
•
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
•
Accessory Output Bin
(HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn only)
•
Printer Memory
•
Printer Hard Disk
•
Job Storage
•
Mopier Mode
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Tray 4
This control specifies whether you have a high-capacity, 2000-sheet
Tray 4
installed on your printer. This tray is standard with the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer. The default setting is
Not Installed
. In order to use
Tray 4
, you must change this setting to
Installed
.
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
If a duplexing unit is installed in the printer, select
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing):
, and then click
Installed
. The
HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer comes with a duplex unit installed. The duplex unit is an optional accessory for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer. When the duplex unit is installed, the
Print on Both Sides
control appears in the
Finishing
tab, allowing you to turn on the duplex feature and select the type of binding for the print job, or to turn off the duplex feature.
Accessory Output Bin
Use this setting to indicate that an accessory output bin is installed on your printer. The following settings are available:
•
Not Installed
(default)
•
HP 3000-Sheet Stacker
•
HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker
•
HP Multifunction Finisher
The HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer comes with one of these accessories. When an accessory output bin is installed, you can tell the printer to send printed pages to a particular output bin. If you have the
HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker or the HP Multifunction Finisher, you can also select stapling and folding options.
To select a default output bin, right-click the printer icon in the
Printers
folder, select
Printer Preferences
, click the
Destination
tab, and select the bin you want to use. To select an output bin for each print job, click
from the
File
menu of your software program, click
Properties
, click on the
Destination
tab, and then choose the bin you want to use.
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory installed in the printer. The driver generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the printer can accept. The driver can use this information to manage how the driver uses the printer memory.
Note
Printer Hard Disk
You can use the
Printer Hard Disk
option to specify whether the printer has a hard disk installed. The default setting is
Uninstalled
. Installation of a printer hard disk allows you to use the
Job Storage
functions. For more information, see the "Job Storage" section of this guide.
The HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn comes with a hard disk already installed. The hard disk is an available option for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n.
Storage
You can use the
Job Storage
option to specify whether
Job Storage
is enabled. The default setting is
Disabled
.
Job
Storage
is automatically enabled if the printer has a hard disk installed. If
Job Storage
is
Enabled
, then
Job Storage
appears as a feature on the
Destination
tab. For more information, see the "Job Storage" section of this guide.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
173
Note
The HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn comes with a hard disk already installed. The hard disk is an available option for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n.
Mopier Mode
A mopier is an HP-designed printer that produces multiple, collated copies from a single print job. Multiple-original printing (mopying) increases printer performance and reduces network traffic by transmitting the job to the printer once, then storing it in the printer hard disk. The remainder of the copies are printed at the fastest speed. All documents can be created, controlled, managed, and finished from the desktop, which eliminates the extra step of using a photocopier.
Both HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer models support the transmit-once mopying feature if the printer has a hard disk installed (the hard disk is standard on the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer and is an available option for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer). The
Mopier Mode
setting in the
Device Settings
tab is
Enabled
by default for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer.
The driver determines whether the printer has mopying capability by detecting the presence of a collation feature in a
PPD/GPD along with any constraints that might apply (for example, requiring that the
Job Storage
setting be
Enabled
in the printer driver). The driver automatically performs collation by selecting the
Collate
check box in the software program
dialog box. If the printer is properly configured, the printer performs the collation; otherwise, the spooler collates the print job. Similarly, if you clear the
Collate
check box in the software program's
dialog box, the copies are not collated. The following table shows the results of various driver
Mopier Mode
and collation settings.
Mopier mode and collation
Table 22: Driver Mopier mode and collation settings
Mopier mode
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Application collation
Not selected
Clear
Selected
Selected
Clear
Clear
Selected
Driver collation
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Selected
Not selected
Enabled Selected Selected
Expected result
3 copies uncollated
3 copies uncollated
3 copies collated by OS
3 copies collated by OS
3 copies uncollated
3 copies uncollated
3 copies collated by
Printer
3 copies collated by
Printer
174
HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
About tab
The
About
tab can be found in the
Properties
for the printer driver.
To gain access to the printer driver
Properties
, click
Start
on your Window task bar, click
Settings
, and then click
Printers
(for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click
Printers and Faxes
). Right-click the printer name, and then click
Properties
.
The
About
tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in parenthesis after the model name) along with specific information about each of the components. The information varies according to
HP Color LaserJet 9500 model number, driver, date, and versions. The
About
tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 59: About tab
The
About
tab lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The
About
tab also indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6, PCL 5c, and PS unidriver features
175
Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM
In-box file layout
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer system consists of two partitions: one for installation using Windows operating systems, the other for Macintosh operating systems. The files include documentation files and files that are required to install and uninstall the printing-system components.
Note
HP LaserJet software CD-ROM, Windows partition
The root directory in the Windows partition of the printing-system CD-ROM contains the AUTORUN.EXE file and the
SETUP.EXE file, as well as the following directories:
• Fonts
• Setup
• XP_2000
This is also where the files reside for Windows Server 2003.
•
Other directories for the languages that are on the printing-system software CD-ROM
The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories:
•
Drivers directory
•
Manuals directory
•
Reader directory
File layouts differ by language for the European and Asian versions of the software CD-ROM.
To view the files, insert the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software CD-ROM, right-click
Start
, click
Explore
, and then select the CD-ROM drive.
HP LaserJet software CD-ROM, Macintosh partition
The files contained in the Macintosh partition of the HP LaserJet software CD-ROM are grouped by language and reside in the following directories:
•
Root directory
•
HP LASERJET INSTALLERS (for Macintosh operating systems)
•
PDF (for guides and manuals)
File layouts differ by language for the European and Asian versions of the software CD-ROM.
Availability and fulfillment
This section provides information about the availability of the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on CD-ROM is available from HP fulfillment centers or can be downloaded from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj9500_software
176
Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM Software Technical Reference ENWW
In-box CD-ROMs
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM is available in three regional versions. The following table lists the three versions of the software CD-ROM, along with the languages each version supports.
Table 23: CD-ROM versions
CD-ROM version
Americas Dutch (Nederland)
English
Asian
Rest of world
Languages supported
French (Français)
German (Deutsch)
Hebrew
Italian (Italiano)
Portuguese (Português) - Brazilian
Spanish (Español)
Chinese (Simplified)
Chinese (Traditional)
English
Japanese
Korean
Thai (Windows OSs only)
Arabic (Windows OSs only)
Czech (Cesky) (Windows OSs only)
Danish (Dansk)
English
Finnish (Suomi)
Greek (Documentation only)
Hungarian (Magyar) (Windows OSs only)
Norwegian (Norsk)
Polish (Polski) (Windows OSs only)
Russian (Russ) (Windows OSs only)
Swedish (Svenska)
Turkish (Turkçe)
Web ordering
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM and related software CD-ROMs can be ordered from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj9500_software
The links for ordering the CD-ROMs appear on these pages.
Web deployment
Software to support HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers is available for download from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj9500_software
This is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers a notification option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM
177
Printing-system software
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software is available for download from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj9500_software
The software supports the following operating systems:
•
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0
•
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
Note
Standalone drivers
The HP LaserJet PCL 5c, PCL 6, and PS drivers are available individually to support the following operating systems:
•
Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows Me
•
Windows NT 4.0
•
Windows 2000
•
Windows XP and Windows Server 2003
•
Mac 8.6 to 9.
x
•
Mac OS X (10.1 or later)
PCL 5c is not supported in Asian languages.
Point-and-print bundles
Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from a network client so that the client can use the print driver.
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 driver is available in a point-and-print bundle to support the Windows operating environments.
Other operating systems
Drivers and related software are available for these additional operating environments:
•
Macintosh OS (PPDs and Universal Installer)
•
OS/2 (PCL 5c and PS)
•
UNIX
•
Linux
178
Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Software component availability
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system.
In the following table, "9
x
/Me" refers to Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows Me; "2K" refers to Windows
2000; "4.0" refers to Windows NT 4.0; and "XP" refers to Windows XP.
Table 24: Software component availability for HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer
Component 9
x
/Me 4.0
2K/XP
3
Mac
Drivers
PCL 5c
HP traditional PCL 6 driver
HP traditional PS driver
HP PCL 6 unidriver
HP PCL 5c unidriver
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
UNIX
X X
X
X
HP PS unidriver
PS Driver and PostScript Printer
Description (PPD)
Mac PPD
UNIX Model Script
Linux printing drivers and model script
Installers
Common Windows Installer
CD-ROM Browser
Customization Utility
Fonts
INF File (Add Printer)
Font Installer
1
Macintosh Installer for OSs 8 and 9
Macintosh Installer for OS X
Web Registration
Bidirectional communication
Network Bidirectional
Communications
Direct Connect Bidirectional
Communications
Enterprise Autoconfiguration
Macintosh AppleTalk
Remote management and status
Web JetAdmin
Applet for Web JetAdmin
Macintosh LJ Utility
Printer Status and Alerts
Driver Autoconfiguration
Online Documentation
Adobe Acrobat Reader
User Guide
for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500
User Reference Guide
for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500
HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer Install Notes
HP Jetdirect Guide
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Linux
Software Technical Reference ENWW Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM
179
Component
Mac PS Driver Help (for Mac OS 8.6
and Mac OS 9.
x
only)
Help systems
Other
PS Fonts
X
X
9
x
1- Supported as a standalone utility.
/Me
X
X
4.0
X
X
2K/XP
3
X
X
X
Mac
X
UNIX Linux
2- The Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 HP unidrivers have no
Update Now
button, but autoconfiguration is supported over the network using TCP/IP and IP/IPX protocols.
3- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
180
Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM Software Technical Reference ENWW
Software component localization
The following table provides localization information about the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software. The information in this table does not necessarily reflect in-box solutions.
Components that are not available in any given language are supported in English.
Table 25: Software component localization by language, A-I
Component
1
PS PPD
Printer Status and
Alerts
Operating system
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
Mac
X
3
AR CS DA NL EN FI
X
X
X
X x
X x x
X x x
X x x Macintosh PS
PPD
Macintosh LJ
Utility
Macintosh Install
Notes
PCL 6
Mac
Mac x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
PCL 5c
Printing System
Install Notes
Common
Windows Installer
Web JetAdmin
Web JetAdmin
Help
HP Embedded
Web Server
Online manuals
(PDF)
Standard fonts
PS 3 fonts
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000
4.0, 2000,
UNIX
4.0, 2000,
UNIX
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003 x x x
2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
X x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
FR DE EL HE HU IT
X x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
X
3 x x x x
2
X x x x x x x x x x x
X x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
1- Check the following web site for current information about localized IBM OS/2 drivers:
http://www.ibm.com
2- The English manuals are used.
3- The English Printer Status and Alerts is used.
Language key:
Software Technical Reference ENWW Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM
181
AR = Arabic
CS = Czech
DN = Danish
NL = Dutch
EN = English
FI = Finnish
FR = French
DE = German
EL = Greek
HE = Hebrew
HU = Hungarian
IT = Italian
182
Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM Software Technical Reference ENWW
Table 26: Software component localization by language, J-Z
Component
PS PPD
Printer Status and Alerts
1
Operating system
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
Mac Macintosh PS
PPD
Macintosh LJ
Utility
Macintosh Install
Notes
PCL 6
Mac
Mac
PCL 5c
Printing System
Install Notes
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
Common
Windows
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000
Installer
Web JetAdmin 4.0, 2000,
Web JetAdmin
Help
HP Embedded
Web Server
2
UNIX
4.0, 2000,
UNIX
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
Online manuals
(PDF)
2003
Standard fonts 9
x
, 4.0,
PS 3 fonts
2000, XP,
2003
9
x
, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003 x
X x x x x x x x x x x
JA KO
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
NO
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
PT
x x x x x x x x x x x
PL
x x x x x x x x x x x
RU SC ES SV TC TH TR
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
X x x
X
X x x x x x x x x x x x x
1- Check the following web site for current information about localized IBM OS/2 drivers:
http://www.ibm.com
2- The
Networking
tab in the Embedded Web Server appears in English, French, Italian, German, and Spanish only.
Language key:
JA = Japanese
KO = Korean
NO = Norwegian
PT = Portuguese
Software Technical Reference ENWW Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM
183
PL = Polish
RU = Russian
SC = Simplified Chinese
SV = Swedish
ES = Spanish
TC = Traditional Chinese
TH = Thai
TR = Turkish
184
Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM Software Technical Reference ENWW
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
The following tables detail the software features available for each driver type and for each supported operating system that the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers support. The printing system driver for Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 is the new HP unidriver, with a user interface look and feel that is consistent across the PCL 5c, PCL 6, and PS drivers. The printing-system drivers for Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0 are the HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers and the HP traditional PS driver.
Job stream output
Table 27: Driver support for job stream output feature
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
PCL 6 support
PCL 5c support
PCL 6 passthrough support
PS 3
PS 2
UTF-8 encoding for PJL
Windows XP
1
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
X
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mac
Mac
PS
Stream output modes
Table 28: Driver support for stream output modes feature
Operating system
Driver
RAW output
MS EMF output X
EPS
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
X
Windows 95, 98, Me
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
PS
X X
Mac
PS
Connectivity
Table 29: Driver support for connectivity features
Operating system
Driver
Parallel
Network
USB
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 95 Windows 98, Me Mac
X
X
2000
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS PCL 6 PCL 5c PS PCL 6 PCL 5c PS PCL 6 PCL 5c PS PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
185
Bidirectional communication
Table 30: Driver support for bidirectional communication features
Operating
System
Driver
Parallel
Network
USB
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 95 Windows 98, Me Mac
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS PCL 6 PCL 5c PS PCL 6 PCL 5c PS PCL 6 PCL 5c PS PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Table 31: Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration
Operating system
Windows XP
1
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
Driver
HP Driver
Preconfiguration
Feature lockout X
Enterprise
Autoconfiguration
(EAC)
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X
Mac
PS
UI features
Table 32: Driver support for UI features
Operating system
Driver
UI tabs
UI extensions
Page preview images
Printer image bitmaps with hot spots
Paper size dimensions
Page layout graphical representation
About . . .
Update now . . .
Printer bundle setting
Accessibility/ disability
X
X
Windows XP
1
Windows 2000
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
(32-bit),
X
X
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
X
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
Mac
X
X
PS
186
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems Software Technical Reference ENWW
Help features
Table 33: Driver support for Help features
Operating system
Driver
What's this Help
(F1)
Help button
Bubble Help
MS Windows "?"
Help
Windows XP
1
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X X
PS
X
X
X X
Mac
PS
Constraint support
Table 34: Driver support for constraints
Operating system
PS
Constraint messages
Unavailable
(gray-out) options
Windows XP
1
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
2
X
2
X
2
X X X
Driver
Constraint warnings by symbol
X X X
Windows NT 4.0
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X X
X
X
PS
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X X
PS
X X
Mac
X
PS
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
2- Limited set of constraints.
Document layout
Table 35: Driver support for document layout features
Operating system
Driver
Print on both sides
Manual duplex
Flip pages up X
Booklet printing X
X Pages per sheet
(N-up)
Page borders on/ off
Page order
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X X
PS
Mac
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Software Technical Reference ENWW Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
187
Operating system
Driver
Print document on (alternative size)
Scale to fit
Allow scaling from large paper
% of normal size X
X
X
Portrait
Landscape
Rotated by 180 degrees
Number of copies . . .
Ignore application collation
Mopy
X
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
Windows 2000
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
(32-bit),
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mac
PS
Job storage
Table 36: Driver support for job storage features
Operating system
Driver
Proof and hold X
Private job
Job name
User name
PIN
X
X
X
X
Windows XP
X
X
X
X
X
1
PCL 6 PCL 5c
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
X
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mac
2
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
2- Job Storage features are available only in Mac OS 8.6 through Mac OS 9.
x
. They are not available for Mac OS X.
Custom preference storage/recall
Table 37: Driver support for custom preference storage/recall features
Operating system
Driver
Print task quick sets
Print quality
Color options
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X X
PS
X
X
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Mac
X
PS
X
188
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems Software Technical Reference ENWW
Print controls
Table 38: Driver support for print controls
Operating system
Windows XP
1
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6 PCL 5c Driver
EconoMode
DWS
Mopier enable
Print optimizations
Halftoning auto select
Halftoning dither
6x6
Halftoning dither
8x8
Rendering mode
(automatic)
Send graphics as vector
Send graphics as raster
Send page as raster
Resolution
(ProRes 1200
180 lpi)
Resolution
(ProRes 1200
212 lpi)
Resolution
(FastRes 1200)
Resolution (600 dpi)
Resolution (300 dpi)
RET
Scale patterns
(WYSIWYG)
Font DIMM (on/ off)
Send TrueType as bitmaps
TrueType fonts
Levels of gray
Edge to edge
Print text as black
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
X
X
X
X
X
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X X
PS
X
Mac
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Software Technical Reference ENWW Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
189
Watermarks
Table 39: Driver support for watermarks feature
Operating system
Custom watermark
X definition
Watermark angle X
X
Windows XP
Driver
First page only X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
X
X
1
X
X
X
X
PS
Watermark font name
Watermark font color
Watermark font shading
Watermark font size
Watermark font style
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mac
X
X
PS
Paper sizes
Table 40: Driver support for paper sizes
Operating system
Letter
Driver
Legal
Executive
A4
A5
B5 (ISO)
B5 (JIS)
A3
11x17
8K
16K
B4 (JIS) X
Executive (JIS) X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Double Postcard
(JIS)
Envelope #10
Envelope
Monarch
Envelope C5
Envelope DL
Envelope B5
Custom
Custom paper size definition
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows XP (32-bit),
Windows 2000
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mac
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
190
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems Software Technical Reference ENWW
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Paper types
Table 41: Driver support for paper types
Operating system
Driver
Unspecified
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Transparency
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Color
Light
<75g/m
2
Heavy
106-163 g/m
2
Cardstock
> 164 g/m2
Rough
Envelope
User type 1
User type 2
User type 3
User type 4
User type 5
Show media types as sources
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mac
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
Paper sources
Table 42: Driver support for paper sources
Operating system
Driver
Autoselect
Manual feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Assign paper size to tray
Assign paper type to tray
X
X
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
Windows NT 4.0
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
Mac
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
Software Technical Reference ENWW Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
191
Alternative source/paper type
Table 43: Driver support for alternate source/paper type feature
Operating system
Driver
All pages the same
Other pages
Back cover
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
Windows 2000
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
(32-bit),
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X X
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Mac
X
PS
X
Printing destination
Table 44: Driver support for printing destination feature
Operating system
Driver
Top bin (face down)
Straight paper path
Windows XP
1
(32-bit),
Windows 2000
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X X
X
X
PS
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X X
X X
Mac
X
PS
Installable options
Table 45: Driver support for installable options
Operating system
Driver
Duplexing unit
Printer hard disk X
Total memory
Additional source trays
Additional destination bins
Font DIMM
X
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
Windows 2000
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
(32-bit),
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 95, 98, Me
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6 PCL 5c PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mac
X
X
X
X
PS
X
PS-specific features
Table 46: Driver support for PS-specific features
Windows XP
1
Windows NT 4.0 Windows 95, 98, Me
Operating system
Driver
Font substitution
PS memory
X
X
PS
X
X
PS
X
X
PS
X
Mac
PS
192
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems Software Technical Reference ENWW
Operating system
Driver
Output protocol
Send CTRL-D before each job
Send CTRL-D after each job
Convert gray text to
PS gray
Convert gray graphics to PS gray
Add euro currency symbol
Job timeout
Wait timeout
Minimum font size
X
X to download as outline
Minimum font size to download as
X bitmap
PS language level X
Send error handler X
Mirrored output
Negative output
Output options
Optimize for speed X
Optimize for portability
Encapsulated (EPS) X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows XP
PS
Archive format X
TrueType font download option
Outline
Bitmap
Native TrueType
X
X
X
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0 Windows 95, 98, Me
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
1- Mac OS 8.6 through 9.2.2; not supported on Mac OS X or later.
PS
X
X
2
Mac
PS
Software Technical Reference ENWW Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
193
194
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems Software Technical Reference ENWW
4
Installing Windows printing system components
Introduction
The information that follows discusses these topics:
•
Supported operating systems
•
System requirements
•
Font support
•
General Windows installation instructions
•
Detailed Windows installation instructions
•
Setting a default printer
Note
Supported operating systems
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software supports the following Windows operating systems:
•
Windows 95 (parallel and networked only)
•
Windows 98
•
Windows Me
•
Windows NT 4.0 (parallel and networked only)
•
Windows 2000
•
Windows XP
•
Windows Server 2003
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer has not been tested with and does not support Windows 3.1
x
.
System requirements
The following are the system requirements for installing and using the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software on each of the supported operating systems.
•
Pentium (R) processor
•
Minimum 16-color/grayscale display with 640-by-480 pixel resolution (video graphics array [VGA])
•
Same amount of RAM as the minimum requirements for the operating system
•
93 MB of available hard-disk space (on the same partition as the operating system) for full installation
•
Onboard parallel port, USB port, or network connection
Software Technical Reference ENWW Introduction
195
Font support
Basic fonts
Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printer:
•
Arial
•
Courier New Italic
•
Times New Roman Italic
•
Arial Italic
•
Courier New Bold
•
Times New Roman Bold
•
Arial Bold
•
Courier New Bold Italic
•
Times New Roman Bold Italic
•
Arial Bold Italic
•
Symbol
•
Wingdings
•
Courier New
•
Times New Roman
Default fonts
The following default fonts are installed through a typical installation of the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software.
Table 47: Default fonts
File name
ALBR85W.TTF
ALBR55W.TTF
OLVR55W.TTF
OLVR75W.TTF
OLVR56W.TTF
CGOR45W.TTF
CGOR65W.TTF
CGOR66W.TTF
CGOR46W.TTF
CGTR45W.TTF
CGTR65W.TTF
CGTR66W.TTF
CGTR46W.TTF
CLAR67W.TTF
CORONET.TTF
CPSR45W.TTF
CPSR65W.TTF
CPSR66W.TTF
CPSR46W.TTF
GARR45W.TTF
GARR65W.TTF
Albertus Extra Bold
Albertus Medium
Antique Olive
Antique Olive Bold
Antique Olive Italic
CG Omega
CG Omega Bold
CG Omega Bold Italic
CG Omega Italic
CG Times
CG Times Bold
CG Times Bold Italic
CG Times Italic
Clarendon Condensed Bold
Coronet
CourierPS
CourierPS Bold
CourierPS Bold Oblique
CourierPS Oblique
Garamond
Garamond Bold
Font name
196
Font support Software Technical Reference ENWW
File name
GARR46W.TTF
GARR66W.TTF
HELR45W.TTF
HELR65W.TTF
HELR66W.TTF
HELR47W.TTF
HELR67W.TTF
HELR68W.TTF
HELR48W.TTF
HELR46W.TTF
AVGR45W.TTF
AVGR46W.TTF
AVGR65W.TTF
AVGR66W.TTF
BOKR75W.TTF
BOKR76W.TTF
BOKR35W.TTF
BOKR36W.TTF
CHANC___.TTF
DINGS___.TTF
LETR45W.TTF
LETR65W.TTF
LETR46W.TTF
MARIGOLD.TTF
NCSR75W.TTF
NCSR76W.TTF
NCSR56W.TTF
NCSR55W.TTF
PALR65W.TTF
PALR66W.TTF
PALR46W.TTF
PALR45W.TTF
SYMPS__.TTF
TIMR65W.TTF
TIMR66W.TTF
TIMR46W.TTF
TIMR45W.TTF
UNVR65W.TTF
UNVR66W.TTF
UNVR67W.TTF
UNVR68W.TTF
UNVR57W.TTF
UNVR58W.TTF
UNVR55W.TTF
UNVR56W.TTF
Garamond Italic
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
Helvetica*
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Oblique
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Helvetica Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
ITC Bookman Demi
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
Font name
ITC Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Light Italic
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
ITC Zapf Dingbats
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Bold
Letter Gothic Italic
Marigold
New Century Schoolbook Bold
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
New Century Schoolbook Italic
New Century Schoolbook Roman
Palatino Bold
Palatino Bold Italic
Palatino Italic
Palatino Roman
SymbolPS
Times* Bold
Times Bold Italic
Times Italic
Times Roman
Univers Bold
Univers Bold Italic
Univers Condensed Bold
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
Univers Condensed Medium
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
Univers Medium
Univers Medium Italic
Ninety-two additional PostScript 3 emulation (PS) fonts are also available on the CD-ROM.
Table 48: Additional PS 3 fonts
File name
PS_12639.TTF
PS_12640.TTF
Albertus MT
Albertus MT Italic
Font name
Software Technical Reference ENWW Font support
197
File name
PS_14530.TTF
PS-11120.TTF
PS_11119.TTF
PS_11118.TTF
PS_11846.TTF
PS_24516.TTF
PS_12704.TTF
PS_14508.TTF
PS_12581.TTF
PS_12585.TTF
PS_12586.TTF
PS_12582.TTF
PS_24517.TTF
PS_24518.TTF
PS_14513.TTF
PS_10269.TTF
PS_12968.TTF
PS_10369.TTF
PS_10370.TTF
PS_14514.TTF
PS_14515.TTF
PS_10249.TTF
PS_10267.TTF
PS_10268.TTF
PS_14512.TTF
PS_14511.TTF
PS_10267.TTF
PS_24509.TTF
PS_13872.TTF
PS_13874.TTF
PS_13875.TTF
PS_14053.TTF
PS_14054.TTF
PS_14051.TTF
PS_13873.TTF
PS_13870.TTF
PS_13871.TTF
PS_12542.TTF
PS_12544.TTF
PS_10695.TTF
PS_12545.TTF
PS_12543.TTF
PS_14526.TTF
PS_14528.TTF
PS_14529.TTF
PS_14527.TTF
PS_24519.TTF
PS_24521.TTF
PS_24522.TTF
PS_24520.TTF
PS_24523.TTF
PS_14503.TTF
Albertus MT Light
Antique Olive CompactPS
Antique Olive Roman
Antique Olive Roman Bold
Antique Olive Roman Italic
Apple Chancery Italic
Bodoni Poster
Bodoni PosterCompressed
BodoniPS
BodoniPS Bold
BodoniPS Bold Italic
BodoniPS Italic
Candid
Chicago
Clarendon Light
ClarendonPS
ClarendonPS Bold
Cooper Black
Cooper Black Italic
Copperplate32bc
Copperplate33bc
Coronet
Eurostile
Eurostile Bold
Eurostile Bold ExtendedTwo
Eurostile ExtendedTwo
Eurostile Medium
Geneva
GillSans
GillSans Bold
GillSans Bold Italic
GillSans Condensed
GillSans Condensed Bold
GillSans ExtraBold
GillSans Italic
GillSans Light
GillSans Light Italic
Goudy
Goudy Bold
Goudy Bold Italic
Goudy ExtraBold
Goudy Italic
Helvetica Condensed
Helvetica Condensed Bold
Helvetica Condensed Bold Italic
Helvetica Condensed Italic
Hoefler Text
Hoefler Text Black
Hoefler Text Black Italic
Hoefler Text Italic
Hoefler Text Ornaments
Joanna MT
Font name
198
Font support Software Technical Reference ENWW
File name
PS_14505.TTF
PS_14506.TTF
PS_14504.TTF
PS_13778.TTF
PS_13777.TTF
PS_13779.TTF
PS_13780.TTF
PS_12675.TTF
PS_12677.TTF
PS_12625.TTF
PS_12623.TTF
PS_94073.TTF
PS_14525.TTF
PS_24524.TTF
PS_24510.TTF
PS_12506.TTF
PS_12510.TTF
PS_12511.TTF
PS_12507.TTF
PS_14072.TTF
PS_11546.TTF
PS_11545.TTF
PS_11547.TTF
PS_11548.TTF
PS_14507.TTF
PS_13501.TTF
PS_14023.TTF
PS_14024.TTF
PS_13502.TTF
PS_14030.TTF
PS_14040.TTF
PS_14021.TTF
PS_14022.TTF
PS_14029.TTF
PS_14039.TTF
PS_13548.TTF
PS_13547.TTF
PS_14481.TTF
PS_14480.TTF
Joanna MT Bold
Joanna MT Bold Italic
Joanna MT Italic
Letter Gothic Italic
Letter GothicPS
Letter GothicPS Bold
Letter GothicPS Bold Italic
Lubalin Graph
Lubalin Graph Bold
Lubalin Graph Bold Italic
Lubalin Graph Italic
Marigold
Mona Lisa Recut
Monaco
New York
Optima
Optima Bold
Optima Bold Italic
Optima Italic
Oxford Italic
Stempel Garamond Roman Italic
StempelGaramond Roman
StempelGaramond Roman Bold
StempelGaramond Roman Bold Italic
Taffy
Univers 45 Light
Univers 45 Light Bold
Univers 45 Light Bold Italic
Univers 45 Light Italic
Univers 47 Condensed Light Bold
Univers 47 CondensedLIght Bold Italic
Univers 55
Univers 55 Italic
Univers 57 Condensed
Univers 57 Condensed Italic
Univers Extended Italic
Univers ExtendedPS
Univers ExtendedPS Bold Italic
Univers ExtendedPS Italic
Font name
Software Technical Reference ENWW Font support
199
Installation instructions
General installation for Windows 95, 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and 2003
General installation instructions for the Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems are similar.
If the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer is connected through a file or print server, the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems. If the HP
LaserJet printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then bidirectional communication, some Driver
Autoconfiguration methods, and Printer Status and Alerts are not available to the client systems.
For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, administrator rights on the system are necessary to install the software.
When the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing system installer runs, the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always added to the system.
Note
Installing from the printing-system CD-ROM
Follow these instructions to install the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing system from the CD-ROM that came with your printer.
1. Close all programs that are open on your computer.
2. Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
If your CD-ROM does not start automatically, click
Start
, click
Run
, and then browse to and double-click the
SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD-ROM.
3. Click
Install Printer
and follow the onscreen prompts.
Installing from a network or from downloaded files
Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printing system files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the printing-system software file.
1. Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file.
2. Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.
3. Click
Install Printer
and continue to follow the instructions until the printer is installed. For detailed installation instructions, see the "Detailed Windows installation" section of this guide.
Detailed Windows installation
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for installing the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software in Microsoft Windows environments. You can choose to install the software by using either a typical installation or a custom installation.
Note
Typical Installation dialog box sequence
The dialog boxes shown here appear in the Windows NT 4.0 installation sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems.
200
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
The typical installation includes the following components:
• HP Color LaserJet 9500 PCL 6 driver.
• Screen fonts.
• Driver Autoconfiguration (in environments that support bidirectional communication). This option does not appear in unsupported bidirectional communications environments.
The components of a typical installation might vary from printer to printer.
When you select the
Install Printer
option from the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM, the
Choose Setup
Language
dialog box appears. This dialog box does not appear when the setup language is Hebrew or Arabic.
Figure 61: Choose Setup Language dialog box
Note
The
Choose Setup Language
dialog box lists only the languages that are available on the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM.
Table 49: Choose Setup Language dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Choose Setup Language
Text in dialog box
Select the language for this installation from following the choices:
(Drop-down menu lists available languages for installation.)
User options and descriptions
The installer automatically detects the language that your computer system uses and presents this choice as the default.
You can select another language that is available on the CD-ROM by clicking the down arrow of the dropdown menu.
Clicking
OK
initiates the printing system setup.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
Next, the
Setup
dialog box appears.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
201
Figure 62: Setup dialog box
Note
While the
Setup
dialog box appears, the installer is decompressing files into the system
Temp
directory. The elapsed time to complete this action depends upon the performance of your system.
Table 50: Setup dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Setup
Text in dialog box
HP Color LaserJet 9500 Series
Printing System Setup is preparing the InstallShield (R) Wizard that will guide you through the rest of the setup process. Please wait.
User options and descriptions
No user options. This is an information-only dialog box.
202
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 63: Welcome dialog box
Table 51: Welcome dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Welcome
Text in dialog box
Welcome to the HP Color
LaserJet 9500 Printing System
Setup Wizard.
It is strongly recommend that you close all other programs before running this Setup wizard.
Click Next to continue.
Copyright Hewlett-Packard XXXX
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Next
takes you to the
HP Software License Agreement
dialog box.
Clicking
Installation Notes
opens the file READXXXX.RTF.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
203
Figure 64: HP Software License Agreement dialog box
Table 52: HP Software License Agreement dialog box text strings
Text in dialog box
Title of dialog box
HP Software License Agreement
Please read the following license agreement. Use the scroll bar to view the entire agreement.
(Scrolling fields with text of license agreement)
Do you accept the terms of the preceding license agreement? If so, click Yes. If you select No,
Setup will close.
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Yes
takes you to the
Web
Update
dialog box.
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
Welcome
dialog box.
Clicking
No
takes you to the
Exit
Setup
dialog box.
204
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 65: Web Update dialog box
Table 53: Web Update dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Web Update
Text in dialog box
Setup can look for updated software at the Hewlett-Packard
Web site.
Would you like Setup to check the
Web for updated software?
Yes (requires an active Internet connection) (option button)
No (option button)
User options and descriptions
This is a conditional dialog box; that is, it appears only if the Setup program determines that an
Internet connection might be available.
If you select
No
, clicking
Next
takes you to the
Type of
Connection
dialog box. This is the default option.
If you select
Yes
, clicking
Next
starts the Web Update. Details of the Internet installation are not covered in this document. The
Web Update requires Internet
Explorer 4.0 or later.
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
HP Software License Agreement
dialog box.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
205
Figure 66: Type of Connection dialog box
Table 54: Type of Connection dialog box text strings
Text in dialog box
Title of dialog box
Type of Connection
Please select how your printer will be connected:
Connected to this computer (e.g., parallel cable, USB cable or IR)
(option button)
Connected to the network (e.g., the printer is connected directly to the network or shared through another computer on the network) (option button)
User options and descriptions
If you select
Connected to this computer
(a "direct connection" using a parallel cable, universal serial bus cable, or infrared connection), clicking
Next
takes you to the
Select Port
dialog box.
This is the default option.
If you select
Connected to the network
, clicking
Next
takes you to the
Network Setup
dialog box.
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
HP Software License Agreement
dialog box.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
206
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 67: Select Port dialog box
Table 55: Select Port dialog box text strings
Text in dialog box
Title of dialog box
Select Port
Select the port you want to use with this printer:
(This dialog box appears if
Connected to this computer
was selected in the
Type of
Connection
dialog box )
Parallel (option button and dropdown menu)
(Default. When selected, a pulldown list of parallel ports is available.)
Express Install using
HP recommended defaults (check box)
Other (option button)
(When selected, a pull-down list of other port types is available)
Other (option button)
USB (option button)
User options and descriptions
Regardless of the port that you select (Parallel, Other, or USB), clicking
Next
takes you to the printer
Model
dialog box.
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
Type of Connection
dialog box.
Selecting the
Express Install
check box, which is also selected by default, installs the PCL 6 driver.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
207
Figure 68: Network Setup dialog box
Table 56: Network Setup dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Network Setup
Text in dialog box
Indicate the type of network connection
(If
Connected to the network
was selected in the
Type of
Connection
dialog box),
Next
takes you to the
Network Printer
Configuration
dialog box.
Basic Microsoft Server Setup
(option button)
Create a connection (network port) to a printer attached directly to the network. Your computer will manage its own print jobs and may optionally share the printer with other network users.
Client Setup (option button)
The printer is already set up as a shared printer on the network and is managed by a server or another
PC.
Help me determine which setup is right for me (option button)
Setup will ask you questions to help you determine the appropriate network setup for your situation.
User options and descriptions
If you select
Client Setup
, clicking
Next
takes you to the
Specify
Network Path
dialog box, and then to the
Installation Type
dialog box.
If you select
Help me
, clicking
Next
initiates a series of question dialog boxes that help you determine the best connection-type option to follow. This series begins with the
Cable Type Selection
dialog box.
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
Type of Connection
dialog box.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
208
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 69: Network Printer Configuration dialog box
Table 57: Network Printer Configuration dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Network Printer Configuration
Text in dialog box
How do you want to identify the network printer you are installing?
Search from a list of available printers (option button)
(Description) Searches the local network for printers and allows you to choose your printer from a list of discovered printers.
Specify a printer by address
(option button)
(Description) Allows you to specify your printer by entering one of the following attributes: Hardware
Address, IP Address, IP Hostname, or IPX Address.
Description
(Conditional text)
User options and descriptions
If you select
Search from a list of available printers
, clicking
Next
takes you to the
Identify Printer
dialog box.
If you select
Specify a printer by address
, clicking
Next
takes you to the
Identify Printer
dialog box.
Always select
Specify a printer by address
when the printer address is available. On large networks, selecting
Search from a list of available printers
might not reveal the location of a specific printer.
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
Network Setup
dialog box.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
209
Figure 70: Identify Printer dialog box (1 of 2)
Figure 71: Identify Printer dialog box (2 of 2)
210
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Table 58: Identify Printer dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Identify Printer
Text in dialog box
(dialog box 1)
Select the network printer you want to install.
Printers on your local network:
(List, with attributes of Hardware
Address, IP Address, and IPX
Address listed, if available)
If your printer is not found on the list, click '
Refresh'
, or go back and click
'Specify a printer by address'
.
(OR dialog box 2
Specify the network printer you want to install.
Specify by:
Hardware Address. (option button)
(text field)
IP Address (option button}
(text fields)
IP Hostname (option button)
(text field)
IPX Address (option button}
(text fields)
Description
(Conditional text)
User options and descriptions
If you identify the printer by selecting the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 from the list, clicking
Next
takes you to the
Set Network Communication
Mode
dialog box.
If your HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer is not found on the network, click
Refresh
or go back to the
Network Printer
Configuration
dialog box to specify the device by address.
Clicking
Refresh
updates the list of network printers.
If you identify the printer by specifying a specific network address, clicking
Next
takes you to the
Set Network Communication
Mode
dialog box.
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
Network Printer Configuration
dialog box.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
211
Figure 72: Specify Network Path dialog box
Table 59: Specify Network Path dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Specify Network Path
Text in dialog box
Type the network path or the queue name of your printer. If you don't know its name, click
Browse
to view the available network printers.
Network path or queue name:
(text field)
Browse ...(button)
User options and descriptions
If you type a network path or queue name, clicking
Next
takes you to the
Cable Type Selection
dialog box.
NOTE:
If you reached this dialog box from the
Connected to
Selection
dialog box, clicking
Next
takes you to the
Installation Type
dialog box.
Clicking
Browse
brings up a list of devices that are available on the network.
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
Network Setup
dialog box.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
212
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 73: Set Network Communication Mode dialog box
Table 60: Set Network Communication Mode dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Set Network Communication
Mode
Text in dialog box
Select a communication mode for this printer.
(drop-down menu)
User options and descriptions
Select a communication mode.
Windows TCP/IP (recommended)
is the default setting.
(Conditional text)
TCP/IP Settings
Click
Change Settings...
to change the TCP/IP address, subnet mask, or gateway.
The following TCP/IP settings are specified for this printer.
(Conditional fields showing TCP/IP or other address information)
After you have specified a communications mode, clicking
Next
takes you to the
Model
dialog box.
Change Settings... (button)
Use default port name. (check box)
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
Identify Printer
dialog box.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
213
Figure 74: Model dialog box
Table 61: Model dialog box text string
Title of dialog box
Model
Text in dialog box
Select the model you are setting up.
Model:
(List of HP Color LaserJet 9500 models)
Description
(Conditional text, depending upon which model is chosen in the list)
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Next
takes you to the
Installation Type
dialog box.
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
Select Port
dialog box when you are performing a direct connection installation, or to the
Set Network
Communication Mode
dialog box when you are performing a network installation.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
214
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 75: Installation Type dialog box
Note
The components of a Typical Installation might vary from printer to printer.
Table 62: Installation Type dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Installation Type
Text in dialog box
Choose the installation type.
Typical Installation
(option button)
Custom Installation
(option button)
Recommended for advanced users and system administrators.
Provides more flexibility for installing drivers and software.
User options and descriptions
If you select
Typical Installation
, clicking
Next
takes you to the
Printer Name
dialog box.
If you select
Custom Installation
, clicking
Next
takes you to the
Components
dialog box.
Clicking
Back
returns you to the printer
Model
dialog box.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
215
Figure 76: Printer Name dialog box
Table 63: Printer Name dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Printer Name
Text in dialog box
Specify a name for this printer. You may use the name supplied below or type a new one. The name will be used to identify the printer in your Printers folder.
Printer Name:
(text entry field)
Do you want your Windows-based programs to use this as the default printer?
Yes (option button)
No (option button)
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Next
takes you to the
Printer Sharing
dialog box.
The default printer name in the text field is
HP Color LaserJet 9500
PCL 6
.
NOTE:
A printer name is created for each driver that is installed. The driver type is appended to the name specified in the
Printer
Name:
field (for example,
HP Color LaserJet 9500 PCL 6).
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
Installation Type
dialog box.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
216
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 77: Printer Sharing dialog box
Note
When you do not share the printer, additional driver support is not available. If you share the printer on Windows
NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems by selecting
Share as
, you must type a name. You can also provide additional printer driver support for other operating systems.
Table 64: Printer Sharing dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Printer Sharing
Text in dialog box
Indicate whether this printer will be shared with other network users. If you choose sharing, give the printer a share name.
Not shared (option button)
Share as (option button and text box)
NOTE: Exceeding 12 characters may make the printer inaccessible to Windows 95/98/Me clients.
Client Driver Support (available if the printer is shared)
Additional drivers can be installed on this computer to support automated driver download to clients.
Install a Windows 95/98/Me driver.
(check box)
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Next
starts the file copy process.
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
Printer Name
dialog box.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
217
Figure 78: Finish dialog box
Table 65: Finish dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Finish
Text in dialog box
Your hp LaserJet printer has been successfully installed. Your system needs to be restarted. You will be prompted to restart your computer later.
Installation Details
(button)
Select the actions to perform when
Setup finishes.
Print a test page (check box)
Web Registration (check box)
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Finish
completes the installation process and initiates test-page printing and Web-page registration if those options are selected.
Clicking
Installation Details
opens a dialog box that shows installation details.
NOTE:
If the computer must be restarted, the
Print a test page
and
Web registration
functions occur after the computer is restarted.
218
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 79: Exit Setup dialog box
Table 66: Exit Setup dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Exit Setup
(when
Cancel
is selected during installation)
Text in dialog box
Setup is not complete. If you quit the Setup program now, the program will not be installed.
You may run the Setup program at a later time to complete the installation.
To continue installing the program, click
Resume
. To quit the Setup program, click
Exit Setup
.
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Exit Setup
closes the
Installer program.
Clicking
Resume
takes you to the dialog box that you most recently canceled.
Custom Installation
The Custom Installation gives you the option of installing the following components:
•
HP Color LaserJet 9500 PCL 6 Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
•
HP Color LaserJet 9500 5c Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
•
HP Color LaserJet 9500 PS Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
•
Printer Status and Alerts (for direct-connect (for Job Status only) and for network installations)
•
Screen fonts (for direct-connect and network installations)
•
User Guide (the
User Reference Guide
for the HP Color LaserJet 9500, for direct-connect and network installations)
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
219
Figure 80: Components dialog box, Custom Installation
Note
The components of a Custom Installation might vary from printer to printer.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 computers running a terminal server do not support the
Printer Status and Alerts
option.
The appearance of the
Components
dialog box might vary, depending on printer and connection type.
Table 67: Custom Installation dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Components
Text in dialog box
Select the components you want to install.
Components:
(list with check boxes)
Description
(Conditional text, according to the item currently highlighted in the list)
Space Required
(Specifies disk space required to install components in currently selected in list)
Space Available
(Specifies disk space available on disk drive specified in
Choose
Destination Location
dialog box)
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Next
takes you to the
Printer Name
dialog box.
Clicking
Back
returns you to the
Installation Type
dialog box.
Clicking
Cancel
takes you to the
Exit Setup
dialog box.
NOTE:
Custom Installation automatically selects the options that are available in the Typical
Installation. You can also select from among the following components:
PCL 6 driver
PCL 5c driver
PS driver
Printer Status and Alerts
Screen Fonts
User Guide
220
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Product registration (HP WebReg)
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM browser provides two options for registering the HP
Color LaserJet 9500 series printer:
• registration through the Internet at:
http://register.hp.com
• registration by e-mail
Web registration for Hebrew and Arabic is in English.
To gain access to the product-registration options, go to the main menu of the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-
ROM browser and click
Register Product
. This starts the HP WebReg utility and opens the following window.
Figure 81: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
221
Table 68: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration text strings
Title of dialog box
Hewlett-Packard's Electronic
Registration
Text in dialog box
Welcome to HP's registration. This information is confidential and for
HP registration purposes only. This is the fastest and easiest way for you to join our select group of
HP owners who register to receive:
Direct-to-you details about:
•
Ideas and ways to use your new HP printer.
•
Other exciting HP products.
•
News on emerging technologies.
User options and descriptions
Clicking
WWW Registration
opens the default Web browser and connects to the product registration page at:
http://register.hp.com
Clicking
Electronic Registration
opens the
Welcome to Hewlett-
Packard's Registration
dialog box.
Clicking
Exit
opens the
Exiting
Registration!
dialog box.
Technical support updates.
If you have internet access and would like to register via our World
Wide Web registration page, click here:
WWW Registration(button) (default option)
If you do not have internet access or would rather register via email, please click here to continue with
Hewlett-Packard's Electronic
Registration.
Exit(button)
Electronic Registration (button)
222
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 82: Welcome to Hewlett-Packard's Registration dialog box
Table 69: Welcome to Hewlett-Packard's Registration dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Welcome to Hewlett-Packard's
Registration
Text in dialog box
Welcome to HP's electronic registration. This information is confidential and for HP registration purposes only.
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Previous
returns you to the
Hewlett-Packard's Electronic
Registration
dialog box.
Please select the country/region where you are located: (drop-down menu)
Please continue to go to the next screen and begin your registration
Exit (button)
Previous (button)
Continue (button)
(default option)
Clicking
Continue
starts a sequence of three dialog boxes.
The first dialog box provides fields for typing your registration information. The second dialog box prompts you for information about your HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer. The third dialog box gives you the option of sending the e-mail message to register the printer.
Clicking
Exit
takes you to the
Exiting Registration!
dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
223
Figure 83: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box (1 of 3)
224
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Table 70: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box text strings (1 of 3)
Title of dialog box
Hewlett-Packard's Electronic
Registration
(This is the first of three dialog boxes.)
Text in dialog box
Please complete the following
(required fields are denoted by a blue asterisk):
(The following items are fields unless otherwise noted.)
First name*
Middle Initial
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Previous
returns you to the
Welcome to Hewlett-
Packard's Registration
dialog box.
Clicking
Continue
takes you to the second screen in this sequence.
Clicking
Exit
takes you to the
Exiting Registration!
dialog box.
Last Name*
Company/Organization Name*
Building/Mail Stop/Dept.
Mailing Address*
City/Town*
State* (drop-down menu)
Zip Code*
E-mail Address
Telephone Number
Extension
Occasionally HP communicates information on products and/or programs that may be relevant to you. Please select the method(s) of communication HP may use to contact you. (check all that apply)
E-mail (check box)
Mail (check box)
Telephone (check box)
Please don't contact me unless I specifically request it (check box)
Exit (button)
Previous (button)
Continue (button)
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
225
Figure 84: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box (2 of 3)
226
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Table 71: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box text strings (2 of 3)
Title of dialog box
Hewlett-Packard's Electronic
Registration
Text in dialog box
Please tell us about the Hewlett-
Packard product you purchased:
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Previous
returns you to the first dialog box in this sequence.
(This is the second of three dialog boxes.)
Where will your new Hewlett-
Packard product primarily be used?
* (drop-down menu)
Which Hewlett-Packard product did you purchase?* (drop-down menu)
When did you purchase your
Hewlett-Packard product?* (text box)
Serial Number* (text box)
Clicking
Continue
takes you to the third dialog box in this sequence.
Clicking
Exit
takes you to the
Exiting Registration!
dialog box.
Type the date that you purchased your Hewlett-Packard printer.
Type the printer serial number.
Approximately how many employees work at your...site?
Worldwide?
What is your job responsibility as it relates to HP products?
Exit (button)
Previous (button)
Continue (button)
The questions about the number of employees and your job responsibility appear only if you answered that you plan to use your
HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer primarily for business or telecommuting. Drop-down menus that contain possible answers are provided for your convenience.
(Answering these questions is optional in the registration process.)
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
227
Figure 85: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box (3 of 3)
Table 72: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box text strings (3 of 3)
Title of dialog box
Hewlett-Packard's Electronic
Registration
(This is the third of three dialog boxes.)
Text in dialog box
Please send your registration to
Hewlett-Packard via e-mail.
E-mail (button) (default option)
Exit (button)
Previous (button)
User options and descriptions
Click the
button to send an e-mail to HP that contains the registration information that you specified. A thank-you dialog box appears when the e-mail is sent.
Clicking
Previous
returns you to the second dialog box in this sequence.
Clicking
Exit
takes you to the
Exiting Registration!
dialog box.
228
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 86: Exiting registration! dialog box
Table 73: Exiting registration text strings
Title of dialog box
Exiting Registration!
Text in dialog box
You have selected to exit Hewlett-
Packard's registration.
If you would like to continue with registration, please press the continue button to return to the place where you exited.
Continue (button) (default option)
Otherwise, you may go to the URL below to register your product at any time.
http://register.hp.com/go/register
Thank you for your valuable time!
Exit (button)
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Continue
returns you to the dialog box where you were when you clicked the
Exit
button.
Clicking
Exit
closes the
HP WebReg utility.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
229
Customization Utility for Windows
Use the
Customization Utility
button to create your own customized installation of printing-system components. To start the utility, click
Customization Utility
on the main menu of the HP LaserJet software CD-ROM browser. The following are available options for creating a customized installation.
•
Create Customized Installer
. Using this option, you can create either an interactive or silent (unattended) installer that has been customized by any of the following selections:
•
Language
•
Operating System
•
Printer Model
•
Components
•
Copy Entire Printing System installer
. Using this option, you can copy the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system installer to a selected form of high-capacity media, such as a network drive. The customization utility prompts these choices:
•
Language
•
Operating System
•
Destination Path
Silent installer
You can use the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software to create a silent installer that runs the installation program without user interaction. This installation method is useful when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides or when you want to run the installation without being prompted. You also have the option of creating a custom disk image that contains specific drivers and utilities, which allows you to run the installer without further interaction.
You can perform the silent installation in two ways:
• customized silent installer
• command-line silent installer
Customized silent installer
Use this option to select the printing-system components to include in the silent installation. You can select the operating system, language, printer models, drivers, utilities, and documentation to install.
HP preconfiguration
HP preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that you can use to customize HP and third-party software and distribute the software within managed corporate printing environments. Network administrators can use
HP preconfiguration to preconfigure printer drivers and other printing software, and to manage that software on client workstations remotely. With HP preconfiguration, you can retain customized printer settings during driver updates, rather than replace those settings with the default settings of the new driver.
Note
Command-line silent install
This method cannot be customized. It installs only the printing-system components that are included in the Typical
Installation.
Values that follow an equal sign ( = ) in a command line must not contain intervening spaces.
230
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Method 1: Command line
Type the following at the command line (do not type the beginning and ending quotation marks):
"<CD-ROM-ROOT>/SETUP/SETUP.EXE /U /PORT=XXXX /PRINTER=N /PD=N"
Method 2: SETUP.LST
Use the SETUP.LST file to specify command-line arguments to the installer for an unattended installation. You can send command-line arguments in one of the following ways:
•
Send the command directly to the installer.
•
Send the command using the SETUP.LST file located in the setup directory.
•
Use a combination of the two methods.
For example, this file contains two options:
/port
and
/printer
. The installer operates normally because the
/u
option has not been specified. If you use
setup /u
for the installer, it operates in the unattended mode and uses the two values specified in the defaults section of the SETUP.LST file. If you use
setup /u /printer=1
for the installer, it operates in the unattended mode and chooses the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn. The options specified on the command line override the options that are specified in the SETUP.LST file
The available options can also include the
/u
option. Using this option key makes the installer always operate in the unattended mode. The following descriptions explain the available options:
•
/u
signals the installer to use the specified port and printer that are given on the command line (or in this file), and to use all of the of the default selections. Installation then proceeds without prompting you.
•
/port=xxxx
specifies the default port when performing an unattended installation. The value that is specified by xxxx should be a valid port and should contain no spaces; for example,
LPT1
.
•
/printer=n
specifies the default printer when performing an unattended installation. The value specified by "n" is an integer that references the list of available printers. For example, the following printers are available for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer installation:
0 = HP Color LaserJet 9500n printer
1 = HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer
•
/pd=n
specifies whether the selected printer is the default printer when you have multiple printers connected to your network. The value specified by n is an integer (that is, 0 or 1). For this argument, typing a 1 sets the selected printer as the default printer. Typing a 0, or not specifying a value at all, sets the printer as a non-default printer.
You can preset these options in the SETUP.LST file that is located in the root directory of the HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM. In the defaults section, add the following syntax:
(Defaults)
Options= /port=<value> /printer=<number> /pd=<number>
For example, <value> = LPT1,
Driver-only installation
1. Close all software programs.
2. In Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, and and Windows 2000 OSs, click
Start
, click
Settings
, and then click
Printers
. In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click
Start
, click
Control Panel
, click
Printers and Faxes
(Windows XP Professional) or
Printers and other hardware devices
(Windows XP
Home).
3. Double-click
Add Printer
.
4. Answer the questions in the
Add Printer Wizard
dialog box until you reach the screen that shows the printer manufacturer list.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
231
Note
5. Click
Have Disk
.
6. Browse to the driver location by using one of these options: With
Inbox CD-ROM
, browse to the appropriate directory for your language, then browse to the operating system, and the driver. With
Internet download
, browse to the folder where the Web files were downloaded and decompressed.
Navigating to the operating system before the language (when using the
Inbox CD-ROM
option) leads you to the incorrect .INF file.
7. Select the appropriate information (.INF) file.
8. Click
Open
, and then click
OK
.
9. Select the appropriate printer.
10. Follow the remaining instructions on the screen to complete the printer installation. At this point, the driver has been copied to your hard disk and is included with the list of installed printers.
Note
Point and Print installation for Windows 95, 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and 2003
The following information helps you install a printer driver by using the Microsoft Point and Print function when you cannot see the printer on the network.
Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from a network client so that the client can use the print driver.
This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print. If these procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft.
Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a function of the
Microsoft operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP are supported only on Intel
X
86 processor types. Any other processor types must use Windows NT 4.0 drivers from Microsoft.
To install the printer driver on a Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 server, you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the Windows NT 4.0 printer driver on the Windows
NT 4.0 server (or the Windows 2000 printer driver on the Windows 2000 server), you must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows NT 4.0 Printer .INF file (or the Windows 2000 Printer .INF file) must contain the same printer name as the Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows Me printer .INF file.
Point and Print installation of a PS driver is supported only with a Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98, or
Windows Me PS driver version 4.0 or later.
In a homogenous operating system environment (one with all of the clients and servers running the same operating system), the same printer driver version that is vended from the server to the clients in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server.
However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a different version of the printer driver than the one on the print server. For more information, see the "Point and Print in a mixed operating system environment" section.
For all operating systems, use the Add Printer Wizard to install the appropriate operating system driver on the server and client machines, as shown in the following table.
Table 74: Windows servers with Windows clients
Computer function
Steps
Server and clients 1. Click
Start
, click
Settings
, and then click
Printers
.
Server and clients 2. In the
Printers
folder, double-click the
Add Printer
icon to start the Add Printer Wizard.
Server only 3. Click
Next
, and then click
Local Printer
. Click
Next
. If your operating system is
Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows Me, go to step 6.
Server and clients 4. Select the appropriate port in the list of ports, or click
Add Port
to connect to a network port that is not in the list of available ports.
232
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Computer function
Steps
Server and clients 5. Select the printer model in the list of available printers, or click
Have Disk
if you are installing the driver from an alternative source, such as disk, CD-ROM, or software
Server only
Server only
Server only
Client only download. If you are installing from a software download, you must know the path to where the software has been downloaded.
6. After the installation is complete, highlight the
Printer
icon and click
File
, and then click
Properties
. In the
Printer Properties
window, click the
Sharing
tab.
7. You must enable the File and Print Sharing service for either Microsoft networks or
Novell networks on the server.
8. To exit
Properties
, click
OK
. A hand appears beneath the
Printer
icon in the
Printers
folder, indicating that the printer is shared.
9. You can install the driver using Point and Print in one of the following four ways:
Client only
Client only
Client only
•
In Network Neighborhood, locate the server and double-click the printer share name.
•
In Network Neighborhood, locate the server, and then drag and drop the icon for the shared printer into your
Printers
folder.
•
In the
Printers
folder, open the Add Printer Wizard. The next action depends on the operating system:
For Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows Me, click
Network Printer
.
•
•
For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, click
Network printer server
.
10. Click
Next.
Type the network path or queue name, or select
Browse
to search the network to locate the appropriate path.
11. In Network Neighborhood, locate the server and double-click. Then locate the printer share name and right-click.
12. Click
Install
to complete the installation through the Add Printer Wizard.
Setting a default printer
This section applies to the Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
1. In Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, and and Windows 2000 OSs, click
Start
, click
Settings
, and then click
Printers
. In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click
Start
, click
Control Panel
, click
Printers and Faxes
(Windows XP Professional) or
Printers and other hardware devices
(Windows XP
Home).
2. Select the printer that you want to set as the default printer.
3. From the
File
menu, click
Set As Default
. A check mark appears next to the menu option.
4. Click
Close
.
Windows 3.1x
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer has not been tested with and is not supported in Windows 3.1
x
.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
233
234
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
5
Installation for Macintosh, IBM
OS/2, and Linux operating systems
Introduction
This section provides system requirements and procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software for supported operating systems other than Windows. It also provides information about font support and system modifications. Supported operating systems:
•
Macintosh
•
IBM OS/2
•
Linux
System requirements
The following are system requirements for installing and using the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software on each of these supported operating systems.
Macintosh
•
68 Kb processor
•
Macintosh OS 8.6 or later
•
16 MB RAM
•
20 MB available disk space
IBM OS/2
• Pentium processor
• 32 MB RAM (required for OS/2)
• 5 MB available disk space (required for driver)
Linux
For information about Linux support for the printer, see:
• the HP Linux support home page at:
http://hp.sourceforge.net
• the HP Linux Web site at:
http://www.hp.com/go/linux
Software Technical Reference ENWW Introduction
235
236
Macintosh
Macintosh component descriptions
The printer includes the following software for Macintosh computers:
•
PPDs for Mac OS 8.6 to 9.
x
and Mac OS X (10.1 and later)
• PDEs for Mac OS X only (10.1 and later)
HP LaserJet PPDs
In Mac OS 8.6 to 9.
x
, these PS printer-definition files for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printer are installed to the
Printer Descriptions
folder, which is in the
Extensions
folder within the
System
folder. In Mac OS X, the PPDs are installed in
Library:Printers:PPDs:Contents:Resources:<lang>.lproj
where
<lang>
is the appropriate localized folder.
PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the printing software CD-ROM.
For Mac OS 8.6 to 9.
x
, the Apple LaserWriter 8 driver must be installed to use the PPD file. Use the Apple LaserWriter
8 driver that came with your Macintosh. For Mac OS X, use
Print Center
to print.
PDEs (Mac OS X only, 10.1 and later)
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins that provide access to printer features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings.
HP LaserJet Utility
This Hewlett-Packard printer utility is installed to the HP LaserJet folder in Macintosh OS 8.6 to 9.
x
operating systems.
It provides configuration and management support for PS.
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. The illustrated screens make selecting printer features from the Macintosh computer easy. Use the HP LaserJet Utility to do the following:
• customize the printer control panel messages.
• name the printer, assign it to a zone on the network, download files and fonts, and change most of the printer settings.
• set a password for the printer.
• from the computer, lock out functions on the printer control panel to prevent unauthorized access. (See the printer software help.)
Install notes
This text file contains important information about printer features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and technical assistance.
ColorSync profiles
These text files contain color-matching information for the Macintosh system and HP LaserJet color printers.
Online help
This HTML-based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with Mac OS 8.6 to 9.
x
HP printers. The help system can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help Center.
Screen fonts (Mac OS classic)
These screen fonts are available only for Macintosh computers and Macintosh-compatible computers. Because the screen fonts match your printer fonts, you can see onscreen how your printed page looks.
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Font support
To ensure that you can use all of the installed fonts with the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers, the Macintosh printing system includes the standard 35 screen fonts in 11 families:
•
Avant Garde
•
Helvetica Narrow
•
Times
•
Bookman
•
New Century Schoolbook
•
Zapf Chancery
•
Courier
•
Palatino
•
Zapf Dingbats
•
Helvetica
•
Symbol
The Macintosh printing system also includes the HP 45 XPS font families:
•
Clarendon Condensed Bold
•
Symbol
•
Albertus Medium
•
Coronet
•
Times New Roman
•
Antique Olive
•
Courier
•
Univers
•
Arial
•
Garamond
•
Univers Condensed
•
CG Omega
•
Letter Gothic
•
Wingdings
•
CG Times
•
Marigold
The following bitmap screen fonts reside on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers:
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
•
Helvetica
•
Palatino
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
•
Helvetica Bold
•
Palatino Bold
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
237
238
•
Helvetica Bold Oblique
•
Palatino Bold Italic
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
•
Helvetica Oblique
•
Palatino Italic
•
ITC Bookman Demi
•
Helvetica Narrow
•
Symbol
•
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
•
Helvetica Narrow Bold
•
Times Bold
•
ITC Bookman Light
•
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
•
Times Bold Italic
•
ITC Bookman Light Italic
•
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
•
Times Italic
•
Courier
•
New Century Schoolbook Bold
•
Times Roman
•
Courier Bold
•
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
•
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
•
Courier Bold Oblique
•
New Century Schoolbook Italic
•
ITC Zapf Dingbats
•
Courier Oblique
•
New Century Schoolbook Roman
The following fonts are resident on the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers, but can be used by Macintosh platforms only if you install additional screen fonts. You can either use these screen fonts directly from the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 software CD-ROM, or obtain them from:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj9500
•
Albertus Extra Bold
•
CG Times Italic
•
Marigold
•
Albertus Medium
•
Clarendon Condensed Bold
•
Symbol
•
Antique Olive
•
Coronet
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
•
Times New Roman
•
Antique Olive Bold
•
Courier
•
Times New Roman Bold
•
Antique Olive Italic
•
Courier Bold
•
Times New Roman Bold Italic
•
Arial Courier Bold Oblique
•
Times New Roman Italic
•
Arial Bold
•
Courier Italic
•
Univers Bold
•
Arial Bold Italic
•
Garamond Antiqua
•
Univers Bold Italic
•
Arial Italic
•
Garamond Halbfett
•
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
•
CG Omega
•
Garamond Kursiv
•
Univers Condensed Medium
•
CG Omega Bold
•
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
•
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
•
CG Omega Bold Italic
•
Letter Gothic
•
Univers Medium
•
CG Omega Italic
•
Letter Gothic Bold
•
Univers Medium Italic
•
CG Times
•
Letter Gothic Italic
•
Univers Italic
•
CG Times Bold
•
CG Times Bold Italic
•
Wingdings
•
CG Times Bold Italic
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
239
Note
Installing the Macintosh printing system
On a Macintosh-compatible computer, the installation procedures are the same for a network administrator, a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the printer.
If the computer is connected to the printer by a LocalTalk (printer port) or EtherTalk connection, you must configure the AppleTalk (or network) control panel for the correct connection to communicate with the printer. You must set up the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers, connect them to the computer, and turn them on before the software is installed. Macintosh OS systems do not support parallel connections. You can use either a USB cable or a cross-over Ethernet cable for a direct connection to a computer running the Macintosh OS. In the following instructions, "XXXX" represents the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printer model number.
The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language. Find the language appropriate for the operating system being used, and then use the installer program for that language.
Note
To install the HP LaserJet printer software for the Macintosh OS
1. Insert the CD-ROM that came with the Macintosh printer software into the CD-ROM drive.
If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the
CD-ROM
icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window.
Note
Note
Note
2. Open the
HP LaserJet Installers
folder. Find the
Installer
icon for the appropriate language. Double-click the
Installer
icon to launch the Installer. In the opening dialog, click
Continue
.
The
Continue
button appears only after you type the "Admin" password in the
Authenticate
dialog box (OS X, versions 10.1 and later only).
3. The main
Installer
dialog box appears. Click
Install
and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the software installation.
If you are installing the printer software on a Macintosh OS X system, please be patient. The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1 minute. During this time the installer might appear to be stalled.
If you want to use the HP LaserJet utility (Mac OS 8.6 through 9.
x
only) by using a USB connection to configure
Apple Talk Zone or to name your printer, you must select
Custom Install
and then select
HP USB
and all of the other applicable components. Installing the
HP USB
components requires that you restart your computer. If you do not want to use the HP LaserJet utility, continue with the following
Easy Install
instructions.
4. When software installation is complete, click
Quit
. Choose one of the following options to finish setting up your printer:
•
Set up a USB direct printer connection with Mac OS 8.6 through 9.
x
•
Set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 8.6 through 9.
x
• Set up a printer with Mac OS X
To set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 8.6 through 9.x
1. Open the
Chooser
from within the
Apple Menu
.
2. Click
LaserWriter 8
on the left side of the
Chooser
dialog box.
3. Click the appropriate
Zone
to select it, if required.
4. Click your printer name from the list that appears on the right side of the
Chooser
dialog box, and then click
Create
.
240
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
To set up a printer with Mac OS X
1. In the
Applications
folder, open the
Utilities
folder, and then run the
Print Center
.
2. Click
Add
(in Mac OS X 10.2) or
Add Printer
(in Mac OS X 10.1).
3. From the top pop-up menu, select the appropriate connection type for your printer.
4. Select or type in any other information as indicated for the type of connection for your printer. For example, if you are using an AppleTalk connection, select your printer zone; or if you are using IP Printing, type in an IP address.
If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a PPD file, click the
Printer Model
pop-up menu, select
HP
, and then click
Color LaserJet 9500
.
5. Click
Add
.
6. To configure installable options in Mac OS X 10.2, such as a duplexing unit or optional paper trays, click the appropriate printer icon in the
Print Center Printer List
window. Select
Show Info
from the
Printers
menu, and then select the appropriate options from the
Installable Options
popup menu.
7. Configure the options, and then click
Apply Changes
.
To set up an IP/LPR networked printer with Mac OS 8.6 through 9.x
1. Run the Apple Desktop Printer utility.
2. Click
Printer (LPR)
, and then click
OK
.
3. Click
Change
in the LPR Printer Selection area.
4. Click the appropriate
IP address
and
Queue
, and then click
OK
.
5. Click
Change
and scroll through the list of printers.
6. Click
HP Color LaserJet 9500
, and then click
Select
.
7. Click
Create
.
To set up a USB direct printer connection with Mac OS 8.6 through 9.x
1. Run the Apple Desktop Printer utility.
2. Select
HP Printer (USB)
if you installed this component during a Custom Install and intend to use the HP
LaserJet utility for configuration.
- OR -
Select
Printer (USB)
, and then click
OK
.
3. Click
Change
in the USB Printer Selection area.
4. Select the USB printer in the
Printer Selection
window, and then click
OK
.
5. Click
Auto Setup
to attempt to match a PPD file and USB driver to your printer. If
Auto Setup
fails, click
Change
.
Scroll through the list of printers, select
HP Color LaserJet 9500
, and then click
Select
.
6. Click
Create
.
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system
To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System, drag the PPDs and the unwanted component(s) to
Trash
. See the tables in the following sections for a list of new folders and files added when the HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software is installed in Macintosh OSs.
In-box disk layout
The Macintosh Printing System consists of one file: the HP LaserJet Installer - Integrated installer program.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
241
Note
Folders and files added through installation of the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 software (Mac OS)
The tables in the following sections detail the changes to your system as new folders and files are added when the
HP Color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software is installed on Macintosh OS systems.
This listing does not include temporary directories and files that are created, and then deleted, during the installation process.
In the following listing, "MACINTOSH HD" indicates the drive on which the software was installed.
242
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Mac OS Classic installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS Classic.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This subsection provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy Install (the typical installation option).
Figure 87: HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box
Table 75: HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Splash screen
(This title does not appear in the dialog box.)
Text in dialog box
hp LaserJet for Macintosh
Continue... (button}
User options and descriptions
Click
Continue
to open the
HP
LaserJet Installer
dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
243
Figure 88: HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (easy install)
Table 76: HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings (easy install)
Title of dialog box hp LaserJet Installer
Text in dialog box
Easy Install (drop-down menu)
Click the
Install
button to install:
· Printer Descriptions (Classic)
· hp LaserJet Utility (Classic)
· Install Notes (Classic)
· hp LaserJet Help (Classic)
Disk space available: (conditional)
Approximate disk space needed:
(conditional)
Items will be installed on the disk
"Macintosh HD" (name can be customized)
Quit (button)
Install (button) (default option)
User options and descriptions
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default
"Macintosh HD," click
Install
Location:
to specify a location.
You can also choose the
Custom installation
option from the dropdown menu at upper left.
Easy
Install
is the default.
Click
Read Me
to open the Installer readme file.
Click
Install
to start the installation on the selected disk
Click
Quit
to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
NOTE:
A
Read Me...
button appears on each Macintosh installation screen.
244
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 89: HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)
Table 77: HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings (custom install)
Title of dialog box hp LaserJet Installer
Text in dialog box
Custom Install (drop-down menu)
Printer Descriptions (Classic) hp LaserJet Utility (Classic)
Install Notes (Classic)
User options and descriptions
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default
"Macintosh HD," click
Install
Location:
to specify a location.
hp LaserJet Help (Classic)
USB Components (Classic)
Select which of the available components to install by using the check boxes in the list.
hp Manual Duplex&Booklet
(Classic)
Click the
Read Me
to open the
Installer readme file.
Disk space available: (conditional)
Approximate disk space needed:
(conditional)
Items will be installed on the disk
"Macintosh HD" (name can be customized)
Quit (button)
Install (button) (default option)
Click
Install
to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click
Quit
to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
245
Figure 90: Installing dialog box
Table 78: Installing dialog text strings
Title of dialog box
Installing
Text in dialog box
Items remaining to be installed:
(conditional number)
Installing: HP LaserJet XXXX Series
Stop (button)
User options and descriptions
This dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation. Click
Stop
to interrupt the install file copy process.
Figure 91: Installation was successful dialog box
Table 79: Installation successful dialog text strings
Title of dialog box
(This untitled dialog box begins with the words "Installation was successful.")
Text in dialog box
Installation was successful. If you are finished, click
Quit
to leave the
Installer. If you wish to perform additional installations, click
Continue
.
User options and descriptions
Click
Quit
to exit the Installer. The
Printer Setup Assistant opens.
Click
Continue
to return to the
HP LaserJet Installer.
246
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for the HP Screen Font Installer.
Figure 92: HP LaserJet Screen Fonts splash screen dialog box
Table 80: HP LaserJet Screen Fonts splash screen dialog text strings
Title of dialog box
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts
Text in dialog box
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts
(The phrase "Screen Fonts" is repeated in multiple scripts and languages.)
User options and descriptions
Click
Continue
to open the
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts
dialog box.
Continue (button)
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
247
Figure 93: HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog box
Table 81: HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog text strings (1 of 2)
Title of dialog box
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts
Text in dialog box
Click the
Install
button to install:
User options and descriptions
Click
Install
to start the installation.
Screen Fonts
Install Location
Items will be installed on the disk
"Apple External HD"
Quit (button)
Click
Quit
to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
Install (button) (default option}
When you click
Install
, an installation progress bar dialog box briefly appears. The following table details the contents of that dialog box.
Table 82: HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog text strings (2 of 2)
Title of dialog box
Installing
Text in dialog box
Items remaining to be installed:
(conditional number)
User options and descriptions
Click
Stop
to interrupt the install file copy process.
Stop (button)
Figure 94: Installation was successful dialog box
Table 83: Installation was successful dialog text strings
Title of dialog box
(This untitled dialog box begins with the words "Installation was successful.")
Text in dialog box
Installation was successful. If you are finished, click
Quit
to leave the
Installer.
If you wish to perform additional installations, click Continue.
User options and descriptions
Click
Quit
to exit the Installer.
Click
Continue
to return to the
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer.
248
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Mac OS X installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS X operating system.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy Install (the typical installation option).
Figure 95: HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box
Table 84: HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Splash screen
(This title does not appear in the dialog box.)
Text in dialog box
hp LaserJet for Macintosh
Continue... (button)
User options and descriptions
Click
Continue
to open the
HP LaserJet Installer
dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
249
Figure 96: HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (easy install)
Table 85: HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings (easy install)
Title of dialog box hp LaserJet Installer
Text in dialog box
Easy Install (drop-down menu)
Click the
Install
button to install:
· Printer Dialog Extensions (OS X)
· Printer Descriptions (OS X)
· Printer Descriptions (Classic)
· hp LaserJet Utility (Classic)
· Install Notes (Classic)
· ColorSync Profiles
Disk space available: (conditional)
Approximate disk space needed:
(conditional)
Install location: Items will be installed on the disk "Mac"
Install Location (drop-down menu)
Quit (button)
Install (button) (default option)
User options and descriptions
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default
"Mac," click the
Install Location
drop-down menu to specify a location.
You can also choose a
Custom installation
option from the dropdown menu at upper left.
Click
Read Me
to open the Installer readme file.
Click
Install
to start the installation on the selected disk
Click
Quit
to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
250
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 97: HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)
Table 86: HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings (custom install)
Title of dialog box hp LaserJet Installer
Text in dialog box
Custom Install (drop-down menu)
Printer Dialog extensions (OS X)
Printer Descriptions (OS X)
User options and descriptions
Select the install location using the
Install Location
drop-down menu
(if the desired location is different from "Mac").
Printer Descriptions (Classic) hp LaserJet Utility (Classic)
Install Notes (Classic)
Select which of the available components to install by using the check boxes in the list.
hp LaserJet Help (Classic)
Disk space available: (conditional)
Click
Read Me
to open the Installer readme file.
Approximate disk space needed:
(conditional)
Install Location: Items will be installed on the disk "Mac"
Install Location (drop-down menu)
Click
Install
to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click
Quit
to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
Quit (button)
Install (button) (default option)
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
251
Figure 98: Installing dialog box
Table 87: Installing dialog text strings
Title of dialog box
Installing
Text in dialog box
Items remaining to be installed:
(conditional number)
Installing: HP LaserJet XXXX Series
Stop (button)
User options and descriptions
This dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation. Click
Stop
to interrupt the install file copy process.
252
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
IBM OS/2 Warp 3.0 and later
OS/2 installation instructions
Installation procedures differ depending upon whether or not a printer object exists on the OS/2 desktop. Use the instructions that match the desktop.
Note
Installing a printer in OS/2 when the printer object is missing
Use this procedure when a printer object does not appear on the computer desktop. To create a printer object and install a printer driver, follow these steps:
Use this procedure if the OS/2 desktop does not have a printer object. A system can have this configuration if no printer was selected during OS/2 installation, or if all of the print objects have been deleted from the desktop.
1. Open the
Templates
folder that is located in the
OS/2 system
folder after OS/2 installation.
2. Click the
Printer
template. Press and hold the right mouse button.
3. Drag the template to the desktop.
4. Release the right mouse button.
5. Type a name for the printer in the
Name
field.
6. Select the port to which the printer is connected.
7. Click
Install new printer driver
. A window appears that contains a list of the printer drivers that are shipped with
OS/2.
8. Click
Other printer driver
.
9. Point to the downloaded printer drivers.
10. Click
Refresh
. Wait until the window fills with printer drivers.
11. Click the driver that you want.
12. Click
Install
.
Note
Installing a printer in OS/2 with a pre-existing printer object on desktop
To install a new printer driver using an existing printer object, use the following procedure:
If the 16-bit HP LaserJet driver is installed on a system, delete it before installing this driver.
Use these directions if a printer object exists on the OS/2 desktop, but you do not have the correct printer driver installed on the system. This could happen if a different printer has been added to the system.
1. Right-click the
Printer
object.
2. Click
Settings
.
3. Click the
Printer Driver
tab.
4. Right-click one of the
Printer Driver
objects.
5. Click
Install
.
6. Click
Other OS/2 printer driver
.
7. Point to the downloaded printer drivers.
8. Click the
Refresh
button. Wait until the window fills with printer drivers.
9. Click the driver that you want.
10. Click
Install
.
Additional information about the OS/2 drivers is included in the readme files that come with each driver.
Software Technical Reference ENWW IBM OS/2 Warp 3.0 and later
253
Note
Font support
Fonts can be downloaded to the printer by using the Font Installer feature of the printer driver.
•
Albertus
•
CG Times Italic
•
Symbol
•
Albertus Extra Bold
•
Clarendon Condensed
•
Times New Roman
•
Antique Olive - Coronet
•
Times New Roman Bold
•
Antique Olive Bold
•
Courier
•
Times New Roman Bold Italic
•
Antique Olive Italic
•
Courier Bold
•
Times New Roman Italic
•
Arial
•
Courier Bold Italic
•
Univers
•
Arial Bold
•
Courier Italic
•
Univers Bold
•
Arial Bold Italic
•
Garamond Antiqua
•
Univers Bold Italic
•
Arial Italic
•
Garamond Halbfett
•
Univers Italic
•
CG Omega
•
Garamond Kursiv
•
Univers Condensed
•
CG Omega Bold
•
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
•
Univers Condensed Bold
•
CG Omega Bold Italic
•
Letter
•
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
•
CG Omega Italic
254
IBM OS/2 Warp 3.0 and later Software Technical Reference ENWW
•
Letter Bold
•
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
•
CG Times
•
Letter Italic
•
Wingdings
•
CG Times Bold
•
Line Printer
•
CG Times Bold Italic
•
Marigold
Changing a printer driver in the printer object
After both the printer object and the printer driver have been installed, the correct printer driver should be selected in the print object. This might also be necessary if you are using different printer drivers with a single print object. To change to a different printer driver:
1. Right-click the
Printer
object.
2. Click
Settings
.
3. Click the
Printer Driver
tab.
4. Double-click the
Titlebar
icon.
The printer object is now set up to use a different printer driver. To customize the settings for this printer driver, see the
"Changing the printer properties" or the "Changing the job properties" sections of this guide.
Changing the printer properties
Printer properties describe how a particular printer is physically set up. Examples of printer properties include the amount of memory in a printer, printer-defined forms, forms associated with the printer paper trays, and installed printer patterns.
To set or change printer properties:
1. Right-click the
Printer
object.
2. Click
Settings
.
3. Click the
Printer Driver
tab.
4. Right-click the correct printer driver.
5. Click
Settings
.
6. Change the properties to match the printer setup.
7. Double-click the
Titlebar
icon.
The printer object is now set up to print a job. For information about how to print a job, see the OS/2 tutorial or the information folder.
Changing the job properties
Job properties describe how a particular print job is printed. Examples of job properties include number of copies, print resolution, print quality, and orientation (portrait or landscape). Programs generally have you select a printer object, and let you change the job properties associated with a particular job by selecting setup or options buttons. Under certain conditions, it is appropriate to change job properties outside of a software program, such as when performing drag-and-drop printing.
To change the default job properties associated with a printer object outside of a software program:
Software Technical Reference ENWW IBM OS/2 Warp 3.0 and later
255
1. Right-click the
Printer
object.
2. Click
Settings
.
3. Click the
Job Properties
tab.
4. Change the properties.
5. Click
Save
.
The default job properties associated with a printer object are now set up. For more information about how to print a job, see the OS/2 tutorial or the information folder.
256
IBM OS/2 Warp 3.0 and later Software Technical Reference ENWW
6
Engineering Detail
Introduction
This section presents engineering detail for the following topics:
•
Media attributes
•
Print server operating system migration
Media attributes
This section includes the following information about media attributes:
• paper sources and destinations
• paper-tray configurations
• paper-source commands
• media types and sizes
•
PCL 6 and PCL 5c custom paper sizes
Paper sources and destinations
The following table indicates the standard and optional paper sources and destinations for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers.
Table 88: HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers paper sources and destinations
Paper sources
Paper destinations multipurpose tray (tray 1)
500-sheet paper tray (tray 2)
500-sheet paper tray (tray 3)
2000-sheet paper tray (tray 4)
HP 3000-Sheet Stapler/Stacker accessory
HP Multifunction Finisher accessory standard standard standard standard with the top output bin left output bin
HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn only standard standard
HP 3000-Sheet Stacker accessory one of these accessories is standard for the
HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn
Software Technical Reference ENWW Introduction
257
Paper-tray configurations
The HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers come with a standard multipurpose tray (tray 1), and two 500-sheet trays
(trays 2 and 3). In addition, the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer includes a 2000-sheet tray (tray 4).
The following table indicates the paper tray configurations that are possible for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers.
Table 89: Paper tray configurations for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers
Configurations
HP Color LaserJet 9500n Tray 1
Tray number
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray type
multipurpose tray
500-sheet tray
500-sheet tray
Standard/optional
standard standard standard
HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4 multipurpose tray
500-sheet tray
500-sheet tray
2000-sheet tray standard standard standard standard
Note: A duplexing unit is standard for the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn and optional for the HP Color LaserJet 9500n.
Paper-source commands
The PCL 5c escape sequence for paper source is "Esc&l#H" (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the numeral "1").
See the following table for values of #. For example, "Esc& l1H" is the command for tray 2.
The PCL 6 escape sequence for paper source is "ubyte # MediaSource". See the following table for values of #. For example, "ubyte 4 MediaSource" is the command for tray 2.
Table 90: Paper-source commands
Paper source
Tray 1
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
1
Tray 4 (2000-sheet)
Auto Select
Manual feed
7
2
4
1
5
20
PCL 5c
Esc&l#H
1
2
5
8
3
4
PCL 6
MediaSource #
1
4
3
0
-
3
PS
MediaPosition #
1- Tray 4 is available on the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn only.
Note
Media types and sizes
The tables in this section provide information about media features, media attributes, and paper-handling constraints for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers.
The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the
Size Is:
drop-down menu on the
Paper
tab. The list order can vary, depending on the printer and operating system. The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers.
Table 91: Supported features and attributes by driver
Paper sizes
Letter
Width Heigh t
216 mm
279 mm
2
PCL 5 escape value
1
PCL 6
2 PCL 5 margin x,y portrait
"LETTER" 150,100
(8.5
inches)
)
(11.0
inches
PCL 5 margin x,y landscape
120,100
PCL 6 margins
100,100
PS commands
5
"Letter"
258
Media attributes Software Technical Reference ENWW
Paper sizes
Width Heigh t
3
PCL 5 escape value
1
Legal
Executiv e
Executiv e (JIS)
A5
A4
Envelope
Commer cial #10
Envelope
DL (ISO)
Envelope
C5 (ISO)
Envelope
B5 (ISO)
216 mm
(8.5
inches)
184 mm
(7.25
inches)
216 mm
(8.5
inches)
148 mm
(5.83
inches)
210.0
mm
(8.27
inches)
105 mm
(4.12
inches)
110 mm
(4.3
inches)
162 mm
(6.38
inches)
176 mm
(6.93
inches)
356 mm
(14.0
inches
)
267 mm
(10.5
inches
)
330 mm
(12.99
inches
)
210 mm
(8.27
inches
)
297 mm
(11.69
) inches
241 mm
(9.01
inches
)
250 mm
)
(9.84
inches
(9.5
inches
)
220 mm
(8.66
inches
)
229 mm
1
18
25
26
81
90
91
100
PCL 6
"LEGAL"
"EXEC"
"JISEXEC" 150,100
"A5"
"A4"
"COM10"
"DL"
"C5"
2
PCL 5 margin x,y portrait
150,100
150,100
150,100
142,100
150,100
142,100
142,100
"B5 ENV" 142,100
PCL 5 margin x,y landscape
120,100
PCL 6 margins
100,100
120,100
120,100
120,100
118,100
120,100
118,100
118,100
118,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
"A5"
"A4"
PS commands
"Legal"
"Executive"
"W612h936"
"Env10"
"EnvDL"
"EnvC5"
"EnvISOB
5
"
5
Software Technical Reference ENWW Media attributes
259
Paper sizes
Width Heigh t
PCL 5 escape value
1
80 Envelope
Monarch
98 mm
(3.87
inches)
B5 (ISO)
3
176 mm
(6.93
inches)
B5 (JIS) 182 mm
(7.16
inches)
Double
Postcard
16K
3
11x17
12x18
148 mm
(5.83
inches)
197 mm
(7.75
inches)
8.5x13
216 mm
(8.5
inches)
279 mm
(11.0
inches)
304 mm
(12.0
inches)
B4 (JIS) 257 mm
(10.12
inches)
190 mm
(7.5
inches
)
250 mm
(9.84
inches
257 mm
(10.12
) inches
199 mm
(7.87
inches
)
273 mm
(17.0
inches
)
457 mm
(18.0
inches
)
363 mm
(10.75
) inches
330 mm
(13.0
inches
)
431 mm
(14.33
) inches
65
45
72
17
10
6 none
46
"MONARC
H"
"ISOB5"
"JIS B5"
"JPOSTD" 100,100
"ROC16K" 150,100
"FOOLSCA
P"
"LEDGER" 100,100 none
10
PCL 6
2
PCL 5 margin x,y portrait
150,100
142,100
142,100
100,100
PCL 5 margin x,y landscape
120,100
PCL 6 margins
100,100
118,100
142,100
100,100
120,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
PS commands
5
"EnvMonarch"
"ISOB5"
"B5"
"DoublePostca rd"
"W558h774"
"Ledger" none
"B4"
260
Media attributes Software Technical Reference ENWW
Paper sizes
A3
8K
Custom
(leading edge)
(other edge)
Minimu m:
98 mm
(3.86
inches)
Maxim um:
311 mm
(12.28
inches)
Width Heigh
296 mm
(11.69
inches)
273 mm
(10.75
inches)
t
(15.50
) inches
Minim um:
191 mm
)
(7.5
inches
Maxim um:
469 mm
)
(18.5
inches
419 mm
(16.53
) inches
393 mm
PCL 5 escape value
1
27
19
101
"A3"
"ROC8K"
4
PCL 6
2
PCL 5 margin x,y portrait
142,100
100,100
4
PCL 5 margin x,y landscape
118,100
PCL 6 margins
100,100
100,100
4
100,100
4
PS commands
5
"A3"
"w774h1116" true
1- The PCL escape sequence for paper size is Esc&1#A. The values in this column are for #.
2- The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte array(String)MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for
"String".
3- In Windows NT 4.0, this paper size is treated as a custom size.
4- For custom sizes, the HP traditional PCL 6 driver specifies actual dimensions - for example, for 8-inch by 9-inch custom size, "real32_8.000000 9.000000 CustomMediaSize".
5- The PS command for paper size is "PageSize".
Table 92: Supported input media types
Input media types (PS
Plain
string)
Preprinted
Letterhead
Y
Y
Y
Transparency Y
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Color
Cardstock
Rough
2
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Tray 1 Tray 2 (500-sheet) Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Tray 4
1
(2000sheet)
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Duplexing unit
Software Technical Reference ENWW Media attributes
261
Input media types (PS string)
Envelope
Light
Heavy
Gloss
Heavy Gloss
Non-HP Heavy
Gloss
Tough Paper
(Gloss Film)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Tray 1 Tray 2 (500-sheet) Tray 3 (500-sheet)
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Tray 4
1
(2000sheet)
1- Tray 4 is available for the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn only.
2- Tray 1 accepts card stock at a maximum weight of 164 g/m
2
(45 lb).
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Duplexing unit
Note
PCL 6 and PCL 5c custom paper sizes
The PS driver does not support user-defined media sizes.
The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers.
Table 93: PCL 6 and PCL 5c custom paper sizes
Tray Dimensions
Tray 1
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4
1
(2000-sheet)
Duplexing unit
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Minimum
98 mm (3.9 inches)
191 mm (7.5 inches)
148 mm (5.8 inches)
210 mm (8.2 inches)
148 mm (5.8 inches)
210 mm (8.2 inches)
182 mm (7.17 inches)
210 mm (8.27 inches)
148 mm (5.83 inches)
210 mm (8.27 inches)
Maximum
306 mm (12.0 inches)
469 (18.50 inches)
296 mm (11.69 inches)
432 mm (17.0 inches)
297 mm (11.7 inches)
432 mm (17.0 inches)
296 mm (11.69 inches)
432 mm (17.01 inches)
311 mm (12.28 inches)
469 mm (18.5 inches)
1- Tray 4 is available for the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn only.
262
Media attributes Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Paper type commands
The PCL 5c escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5 letters plus 1, for a total of 6.
For the command to work properly, at least one of the paper trays in the printer must be configured at the control panel for the paper type that is used in the command.
Some paper type options listed in the following table might not be defined in the printer driver.
Table 94: Paper-type commands
Esc&
1
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
5
10
6
11
11
9
7
11
5
15
6
13
6
5
5
11
10
9
n#
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd Paper type
Bond
Cardstock
1
Color
Gloss
Heavy
Heavy Gloss
Gloss Film
2
Labels
Letterhead
Light
NHP Heavy Gloss
Plain
Preprinted
Prepunched
Recycled
Rough
Transparency
2, 3
Envelope
1- The correct command for card stock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an uppercase "S".
2- You must spell out the term "Gloss Film" in the string, although it is shown as TOUGHPAPER on the printer control panel.
3- You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the printer control panel.
Print server operating system migration
The large installed base of printers and print servers in corporate environments, combined with the large user-base for these printers, implies that an operating system migration takes an extended period of time, often months or even years, to complete. Because of this, it is unavoidable that the corporate environment ends up operating with a mix of
Windows NT 4.0 and newer operating systems (Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Server 2003) for an extended period of time.
A number of printer driver issues related to operating in a mixed-OS environment must be considered when planning a print server operating system migration from Windows NT 4.0 to Windows 2000 or later. This section explores these issues and outlines several strategies that HP recommends to support a mixed OS environment with respect to printer drivers.
This discussion is not intended to make specific procedural recommendations for executing a print server OS migration. This discussion is intended to help system administrators and IT managers understand the printer driver
Software Technical Reference ENWW Print server operating system migration
263
issues related to operating in a mixed-OS environment so that the requirements resulting from the recommendations outlined in this document can be factored into migration planning.
The topics discussed here apply to IT environments that are currently running Windows NT 4.0 on the print servers and clients, and are migrating to future operating systems for both print servers and clients. The Windows 9
x
family of operating systems is not discussed in this document because Windows 9
x
clients can be supported with Point and
Print equally well from any server platform. A basic working knowledge of shared printing through Microsoft Windows
Point and Print is assumed.
While much of this discussion is general in nature, all of the specific driver recommendations in this document apply to
HP LaserJet and Business InkJet printers and printer drivers.
Background information and terminology
Version 2 driver
With Windows NT 4.0, printer drivers were considered, generally, to be a class of graphics drivers. Due to the performance requirements of some types of graphics drivers, like display drivers, these drivers executed in kernel mode. A kernel mode process runs in a specially privileged part of the operating system that gives the process access to all of the system resources. Due to the nature of the privileges granted to kernel mode processes, a misbehaving driver can cause serious system stability problems, including operating system crashes. Microsoft refers to these kernel mode printer drivers as Version-2 drivers and this is the term used throughout this section.
Version 3 driver
In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that starting with Windows 2000, continuing with all future operating systems, printer drivers would run as user-mode processes. User-mode drivers execute in a protected part of the operating system just like all of the normal end-user processes and software programs. This protected part of the operating system restricts access to critical system resources to prevent processes from corrupting these resources, which results in an increase in overall operating system stability. A user-mode printer driver that misbehaves is only capable of crashing the process in which it is running, and cannot crash the whole operating system. Usually this is the spooler process or an application process, both of which can be restarted without having to restart the whole operating system. Microsoft refers to user-mode printer drivers as Version-3 drivers, and this is the term that is used throughout this section.
Version-3 printer drivers are the native or preferred printer driver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows
Server 2003; however, all of these operating systems are also capable of running version-2 printer drivers. Many older
Windows NT 4.0 version-2 printer drivers are blocked in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 because they are known to cause operating system stability problems with these newer operating systems. These newer operating systems identify these older drivers and do not allow them to be installed. Refer to
Microsoft
Knowledge Base
article 247196 for more information about determining whether a particular printer driver is blocked in newer operating systems. None of HP’s current version-2 drivers are blocked in these newer operating systems.
Windows NT 4.0 is capable of running only version-2 printer drivers.
The following table shows the driver versions that are supported by Microsoft for each operating system.
Table 95: Operating system and driver version support
Operating system Version 2
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003 x x x x
1 x x x
Version 3
1
Windows 2003 Server does not officially support kernel-mode printer drivers by default. This feature must be turned on in the registry and is not officially supported by Microsoft.
264
Print server operating system migration Software Technical Reference ENWW
Point and Print in a mixed operating system environment
When using Point and Print, the print queue configuration is stored on, and managed from, the print server. Client computers get the print queue configuration and the printer driver from the print server. Changes to the printer driver on the server, or its configuration, are automatically replicated to the client.
In a homogenous operating system environment (all of the clients and servers are running the same operating system), the printer driver that is vended from the server to the clients in a Point and Print environment is the same printer driver that is running and controlling the print queue configuration on the server. In this case, there is no doubt that the client computer can correctly interpret the print queue configuration and printing behaves as expected.
However, in a mixed operating system environment that typically occurs during an operating system migration, there are situations in which client computers could be running a different version of the printer driver than the one that is running on the print server. In order for this situation to work correctly, the printer driver that is running on the client must be capable of correctly interpreting the configuration that was created by the printer driver running on the print server. (Microsoft refers to the data structure in which this configuration is stored as the DEVMODE, but for the purposes of this section, we refer to this as the print queue configuration.)
The following figure illustrates a situation involving a Windows NT 4.0 print server that is supporting a mixed client base of Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000, XP, or 2003 clients. Because the server is running Windows NT 4.0, it is running a version-2 driver and the print queue configuration is created by this driver. A version-3 driver has been added to this server for vending to Windows 2000, XP, or 2003 clients (Microsoft documents a special procedure to accomplish this which is discussed later).
When Windows NT 4.0 clients make a connection to this shared printer on the Windows NT 4.0 print server, it is vended the same version-2 printer driver that is running on the print server. Because this is the same printer driver that created the print queue configuration, there is no problem reading this configuration and all of the print jobs functions as expected. However, when a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 client makes a connection to this shared printer on the Windows NT 4.0 print server, it is vended the added version-3 printer driver. In this illustration, the version-3 printer driver is not written to be able to correctly interpret the data structure which stores the print queue configuration and this does have an impact on printing functionality because the version-3 printer driver on the Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 client does not “see” all of the installed options as they are configured in the version-2 printer driver on the print server.
Figure 99: Mixed driver-version compatibility
Software Technical Reference ENWW Print server operating system migration
265
Symptoms of driver incompatibility in a mixed OS environment
There is no single set of symptoms to be seen when client and server printer drivers are not compatible, but common symptoms include the clients not being able to see the proper queue configuration with respect to installed device options and default settings. Other problems in functionality can include the inability to print in landscape or from a specific paper tray.
When an incompatible mix of version-2 and version-3 printer drivers is present in the environment, unexpected behavior can occur due to some of the more subtle behaviors of Point and Print that are not obvious. The following figures illustrate an environment that contains incompatible version-2 and version-3 printer drivers. This section examines examples of how incompatible drivers can affect printing functionality.
In the example illustrated in the following figure, there is a Windows NT 4.0 print server and a Windows 2000 print server. The Windows 2000 client illustrated in this figure is a laptop computer user who occasionally travels between different office locations for business.
In Event #1, at the home office, the Windows 2000 client makes a connection to the local print server. This local print server is running Windows NT 4.0 and contains only a version-2 driver for the printer in question. Suppose, for example, that this is the “HP LaserJet 4000 Series PCL 6” version-2 driver. The Windows 2000 client is vended this version-2 printer driver and because client and server are both running the same printer driver, printing works as expected.
In Event #2, the client takes a business trip to a remote site. While at the remote site, the client user needs to print and makes a connection to a shared printer. The server for this shared printer at the remote site is hosted from a print server that has been migrated to Windows 2000 and contains a version-3 driver, which is also the “HP LaserJet 4000
Series PCL 6” printer driver. Now, the client computer already has a printer driver named “HP LaserJet 4000 Series
PCL 6”, but it is a version-2 driver and Windows 2000 prefers to use a version-3 printer driver when it is available. So in this case, because the print server at the remote site has a matching driver, which is version-3, the Windows 2000 client downloads this version-3 driver and now runs this printer driver.
The connection to the remote print server silently upgraded the client computers printer driver to a version-3 driver.
While still at the remote site, the client and server are both running the same printer driver and printing works as expected. However at Event #3, when the client returns to the home office and tries to print, problems occur because the printer driver being used on the client is not the same as that being used on the server and these two printer drivers are incompatible with each other.
266
Print server operating system migration Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 100: Introduction of incompatible printer drivers through a silent driver upgrade
The example illustrated in the following figure is similar, except in this scenario the client first makes a connection to a
Windows 2000 server with the version-3 “HP LaserJet 4000 Series PCL 6” printer driver. Initially, because client and server are both running the same printer driver, printing works as expected. However, in Event #2, the client makes a connection to a printer that also uses a “HP LaserJet 4000 Series PCL 6” printer driver. But the printer driver on this
NT 4.0 server is a version-2 printer driver. Because the client already has a matching printer driver that is version-3, it just continues to use this printer driver. If these version-2 and -3 printer drivers are not compatible, then printing problems occur when trying to print to this second printer.
Figure 101: Native printer driver preference with incompatible version-2 and version-3 drivers
Software Technical Reference ENWW Print server operating system migration
267
268
Migration strategies
What follows is the exploration of three different strategies for being able to support Point and Print in a mixed operating-system environment. The three strategies are not necessarily mutually exclusive but can in some cases be combined or partially used concurrently to ensure that all of the client computers are served with a supportable printer driver configuration. Formulating a solution based on these strategies involves examining the list of printers to be supported and the list of page description languages required for use on these printers along with other site-specific migration requirements, and drafting a plan by which all of the client computers can be served with a supported driver configuration.
Strategy 1: Use Windows NT 4.0 drivers to support all clients
In this approach we seek to avoid printer driver compatibility issues altogether by isolating the Windows NT 4.0, clients and servers, from newer operating systems, thus running a dual printing environment temporarily. This is accomplished by leaving existing Windows NT 4.0-based print servers in place to serve the existing legacy Windows
NT 4.0 client base and deploying new Windows 2000 or .NET print servers to support the migrated client base running
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003. As clients are migrated, they are reconnected to the new print queues hosted on the new Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 Server print servers. At the end of the migration when there are no more Windows NT 4.0 clients, the Windows NT 4.0 print servers can be retired.
This approach ensures that the print servers and clients are always running the same correct printer drivers, thus avoiding any incompatibilities that may otherwise exist.
Advantages of this approach include not having to do any additional work to the legacy NT 4.0 clients and servers and ending up with the proper version-3 drivers for all of the products at the end of the migration, and most importantly, all printer models and drivers can be supported using this approach.
Strategy 2: Use Windows NT 4.0 drivers to support all clients
Because Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 are capable of running Version-2 printer drivers, a simple approach might be to use Version-2 printer drivers to support all of the servers and clients. In this way version-2 and version-3 printer driver compatibility issues are avoided because only version-2 printer drivers are deployed in the solution. In fact, this is the recommendation Microsoft makes if driver incompatibility issues arise.
In general, this is a safe recommendation to make for version-2 PS printer drivers which are based on Microsoft’s PS driver core. However, caution is advised because, while HP’s version-2 PCL drivers are compatible with Windows
2000, they are not all compatible with Windows XP or Windows 2003 Server. The HP version-2 PCL printer drivers should not be installed on Windows Server 2003 servers, nor should Windows XP clients connect to print queues hosted from Windows NT 4.0 print servers that have only version-2 PCL printer drivers installed. “Installed” means that the printer driver running the queue on .NET server should not be a version-2 PCL driver. It is acceptable to create a printer on .NET using a version-3 driver, and then add the compatible version-2 driver for NT clients, however, as described in Strategy 3.
While this strategy has the advantage of simplicity, there are several disadvantages. Because of the restriction for version-2 PCL printer drivers described previously, not all printer products and page description languages can be supported. Another disadvantage of this strategy is the inherent risk associated with running version-2 printer drivers.
Finally, at the end of the migration period when all of the clients and servers have been migrated to newer operating systems, the printer drivers being used are all version-2 Windows NT printer drivers; this would definitely lead to further work to upgrade all of the version-2 printer drivers to their version-3 counterparts.
Also note that many older version-2 printer drivers cannot be used with this strategy because they are incompatible with Windows 2000, XP, and 2003, and are blocked from installation by those operating systems. Therefore, it is necessary to update existing version-2 printer drivers prior to deploying to migrated servers or clients.
Strategy 3: Use a mix of version-2 and version-3 drivers to support all clients
In this approach, all of the version-2 and version-3 printer drivers are installed on the print server that are necessary to support a mixed client base during the migration as is illustrated graphically in the following figure. As mentioned previously, these printer drivers must be compatible with one another in such a way that they store the driver configuration in a format that is common to both drivers. HP has compatible printer driver pairs available for most printers and page description languages, as described in the following tables. The information in the tables describes the printers and specific printer driver versions that can be installed together on a server in this manner.
Print server operating system migration Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 102: Using version-2 and version-3 drivers to support a mixed client base
Adding version-2 printer drivers for NT 4.0 clients to existing print queues hosted on Windows 2000 or .NET Server is typically accomplished by accessing the
Sharing
tab on the printers
Properties
dialog box and clicking on the
Additional Drivers
button.
Adding version-3 drivers for 2000, XP, or 2003 clients to existing print queues hosted on a Windows NT 4.0 Server is possible but requires a special workaround that is contained in the
Microsoft Knowledge Base
article 263090 at:
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=KB;en-us;263090&
Please note that it is necessary to follow the steps outlined in the following referenced article (
Microsoft Knowledge
Base
article, 318577) to accomplish adding version 3 drivers to Windows NT 4.0:
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=KB;en-us;318577&
If Windows NT 4.0 Server is to be used as a print server for this strategy, it might be necessary to update the existing version-2 printer drivers to conform to the printer driver version numbers listed in the following tables, "Compatible
PCL 5 and PCL 6 drivers" and "Compatible PS drivers".
For the newer LaserJet printer models, the version-2 and version-3 PCL drivers that are contained on the product CD and on the HP web site are based on completely different printer driver architectures and are incompatible for the purposes of strategy #3. As is noted in the following tables, it is necessary to obtain a special version-3 printer driver for these products. These special version-3 printer drivers are compatible with the version-2 printer drivers that ship with these printers. To obtain these drivers go to:
http://www.hp.com/pond/pnp
Table 96: Compatible PCL 5 and PCL 6 drivers
Printer series
1
HP LaserJet 1100
HP LaserJet 1200/1220
HP LaserJet 2100
HP LaserJet 2200
HP Color LaserJet 2500
HP LaserJet 3200
HP LaserJet 3300
HP LaserJet 4
HP LaserJet 4 plus
HP LaserJet 4si
HP LaserJet 4V
PCL 5 driver
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.208
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.192
4.14.0.18
4.3.2.208
4.19.3300.3
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.200
None
4.3.2.208
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.192
4.14.0.18
4.3.2.208
4.19.3300.3
None
None
None
None
PCL 6 driver
Software Technical Reference ENWW Print server operating system migration
269
Printer series
1
HP LaserJet 4000
HP LaserJet 4050
HP LaserJet 4100
HP LaserJet 4200
HP LaserJet 4300
HP Color LaserJet 4500
HP Color LaserJet 4550
HP Color LaserJet 4600
HP LaserJet 5
HP LaserJet 5N
HP LaserJet 5si
HP LaserJet 5000
HP LaserJet 5100
HP Color LaserJet 5500
HP LaserJet 8000
HP LaserJet 8100
HP LaserJet 8150
HP Color LaserJet 8550
HP LaserJet 9000
PCL 5 driver
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.201
4.20.4100.420
2
2
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.207
4.20.4600.430
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.201
4.20.5100.430
4.18.5500.420
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.207
4.3.2.201
4.20.9000.430
PCL 6 driver
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.201
4.20.4100.420
2
2
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.207
4.20.4600.430
None
None
None
4.3.2.201
4.20.5100.430
4.18.5500.420
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.207
None
4.20.9000.430
1
No compatible drivers are available for printer series that are not listed.
2
Compatible PCL 5 and PCL 6 drivers are available for these printers on an HP Web site. To download these drivers, go to:
http://www.hp.com/pond/pnp
270
Print server operating system migration Software Technical Reference ENWW
Table 97: Compatible PS drivers
Printer series
1
HP LaserJet 1200/1220
HP LaserJet 2100
HP LaserJet 2200
HP Color LaserJet 2500
HP LaserJet 3300
HP LaserJet 4
HP LaserJet 4 plus
HP LaserJet 4si
HP LaserJet 4V
HP LaserJet 4000
HP LaserJet 4050
HP LaserJet 4100
HP Color LaserJet 4500
HP Color LaserJet 4550
HP Color LaserJet 4600
HP LaserJet 5
HP LaserJet 5N
HP LaserJet 5si
HP LaserJet 5000
HP LaserJet 5100
HP Color LaserJet 5500
HP LaserJet 8000
HP LaserJet 8100
HP LaserJet 8150
HP LaserJet 9000
None
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
None
None
4.0
4.0
None
None
PS driver
2
4.3.2.172
1.0
None
None
4.19.3300.3
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
4.0
4.0_1.30
None
4.1.1
None
1.0.0.0
None
None
None
4.3.2.201
1.0.0.0
2.0.0.0
None
None
2.05
2.0.14
PS 4 driver
2,3,4
None
None
2.0.0.0
1.0.0.0
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
3.08
None
5.00.2195.2307
PS 5 driver
4
4.3.2.172
None
2.0.0.0
1.0.0.0
4.19.3300.3
02.12.01
02.12.01
02.12.01
02.12.01
None
None
3.08
None
5.00.2195.2307
1.0.0.0
02.12.01
02.12.01
02.12.01
None
1.0.0.0
60.03.14.02
None
None
2.05
2.0.14
1
No compatible drivers are available for printer series that are not listed.
2
Version-2 drivers.
3
Compatible only on Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000.
4
PS 4 drivers can coexist with PS 5 drivers and are compatible with Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Print server operating system migration
271
Frequently asked questions
What drivers do I have installed?
To determine which versions of a particular printer driver are installed on a computer, you can open the printer
Properties
dialog box for a printer that uses that driver and click on the
Sharing
tab and then click on the
Additional
Drivers
button. Printer drivers listed with a check mark in the
Environment
column are installed on this computer.
Printer drivers listed as “Windows NT 4.0” or “Windows NT 4.0 or 2000” are version-2 printer drivers. Those listed as
“Windows 2000”, “Windows 2000 or XP” or “Windows 2000, XP or 2003” are version-3 printer drivers. The following illustrations show examples from the Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
Figure 103: Additional Drivers dialog box in Windows 2000
272
Print server operating system migration Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 104: Additional Drivers dialog box in Windows XP
Figure 105: Additional Drivers dialog box in Windows Server 2003
The
Additional Drivers
dialog box shows which printer drivers are installed for a particular print queue. To determine which types of printer drivers are installed for all printer drivers, open the
Server Properties
dialog box from the
Software Technical Reference ENWW Print server operating system migration
273
Printers
folder (
File
->
Server Properties
) and click the
Drivers
tab. Using
Server Properties
is useful because it lists the printer driver names along with the
Environment
and
Version
information.
Windows NT 4.0 does not have a
Drivers
tab in its
Server Properties
dialog box. Information about installed printer drivers can be obtained on Windows NT 4.0 by examining the following registry keys (for Intel x86 architectures):
•
HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Environments\Windows NT x86\Version-2
•
HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Environments\Windows NT x86\Version-3
I used
Microsoft Knowledge Base
article 263090 to add version-3 printer drivers to my Windows NT 4.0 print server, but my Windows 2000 clients are having printing problems.
It may be necessary to update the existing version-2 printer drivers on the NT 4.0 print server to versions that are compatible with the version-3 printer drivers. Refer to the tables in the "Migration strategies" section of this guide.
If no compatible version-3 printer driver is available, consider using a Windows NT 4.0 PS-based printer driver.
XP or 2003 clients connected to print queues hosted on our NT 4.0 print servers and the clients experience intermittent hangs/crashes.
HP’s version-2 PCL printer drivers are not compatible with Windows XP and Windows Server 2003. If a compatible version-3 printer driver is listed in the tables in the "Migration strategies" section of this guide, add this driver to the print server using the technique described in
Microsoft Knowledge Base
article 263090.
Reference
For more information about operating system migration and related topics, visit the following Web sites:
•
Point and Print Technical Overview document:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows2000/technologies/fileandprint/print/pointprint.asp
•
Print Server Upgrade, Migration, and Interoperability document:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows2000/technologies/fileandprint/print/miginterop.asp
•
Print Migrator Utility – backup/restore print queues; move print queues between servers:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows2000/technologies/fileandprint/print/download.asp
•
Fixprnsv.exe – used to identify Win2K blocked printer drivers on qn NT 4 server:
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=KB;en-us;247196&
• MS Knowledge-base article for installing version-3 printer drivers on Windows NT 4.0 Server:
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;[LN];Q263090
274
Print server operating system migration Software Technical Reference ENWW
Index
% of Normal Size option in drivers 81
accessibility support in drivers 186
ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) compliance 25
availability by operating system 179
Adobe PS 3 emulation support 121
Adobe PS printer drivers and fonts 121
configuring for Printer Status and Alerts 39
configuring in HP Embedded Web Server 38
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) compliance 25
autoconfiguration utility, driver 29
Back Cover option in drivers 97
bidirectional communication 25
availability by operating system 179
Enterprise AutoConfiguration 30
operating systems supported 26
Binary or TBCP output protocol 130
operating systems and drivers supported 192
bitmaps, converted from TrueType 77 black, printing all text as 77
Booklet Printing option in drivers 71
borders option for pages in drivers 149
Index
installing Macintosh printing-system software 240
installing Windows printing-system software 56
installing Windows printing-system software 200
Choose Setup Language dialog box, Windows 201
Citrix Terminal Server 23 defined 23
ColorSync profiles for Macintosh operating systems 236
command-line silent install for Windows 230
configuration page and diagnostics 37
Configuration Page, HP Embedded Web Server 34
network security 37 network settings 37
bidirectional communication support 25
Type of Connection dialog box, Windows 206
constraint messages 64 context-sensitive help 64
viewing with HP Embedded Web Server 33
Copy Count option in drivers 135
cover, back, option in drivers 97
Custom Installation dialog box, Windows 220
custom installation for Windows 219
custom paper sizes 91 driver options 91
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
custom preference recall support 188
custom Print Task Quick Sets 69
customer support for product 35
Customization Utility 56 description 56
275
destinations, enabling optional paper 115
Device Information page, HP Embedded Web Server 33
Device Settings tab in drivers 128
Device Status page, HP Embedded Web Server 33
dialog boxes, printing-system software installation 200
different paper sizes, printing documents with 81
directory structure, printing-system software CD-ROM 176
Macintosh, IBM OS/2, and Linux 235
document layout features driver support 187
Document Options in drivers 123
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 25 install notes 25 installing online 25
online, availability by operating system 179
Print Task Quick Set for use guide 69
Print Task Quick Set for use guide 142
double-sided printing options in drivers 70
firmware 176 printing-system software 176
Driver Extensions information in drivers 107
availability by operating system 179
bidirectional communication support 186
custom preference recall support 188
276
document layout features support 187
Enterprise AutoConfiguration 29
Enterprise AutoConfiguration 30
HP Driver Preconfiguration support 186
Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages 132
installable options support 192
object for IBM operating systems, changing 255
older, using with new printers 58
operating system migration 263
Point and Print installation 232
stream output mode support 185
duplex printing options in drivers 70
duplexing unit 93 custom paper sizes 93
embedded Web server.
See
HP Embedded Web Server
Enterprise AutoConfiguration 27
Index
operating systems supported 27
operating systems supported 179
escape sequences 258 paper source 258
EWS.
See
HP Embedded Web Server
Exit Setup dialog box, Windows 219
file layout for printing-system software CD-ROM 176
Finish dialog box, Windows 218
First Page option in drivers 89
Flip Pages Up option in drivers 71
Font DIMM option in drivers 116
Font Settings options in drivers 77
configuring for watermarks 157
outline versus bitmap settings 130
Graphics Mode in printer drivers 138
guides.
See
documentation
hard disk, models including 21
availability by operating system 180
Index
operating systems supported 187
unidrivers (WIndows 2000, XP, and Server 2003) 132
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 25
HP Jetdirect EIO cards, supported 22
HP LaserJet Screen Font Installer 247
HP LaserJet Utility 179 availability by operating system 179
HP Network Registry Agent (HPNRA) 30
HP Software License Agreement dialog box, Windows 204
availability by operating system 179
operating systems supported 60
availability by operating system 179
HPNRA (HP Network Registry Agent) 30
availability of software components 179
changing printer drivers in the printer object 255
installing printer software 253
job properties, changing 255 properties, changing printer 255
Identify Printer dialog box, Windows 211
Ignore Application Collation options in drivers 118
image of printer in drivers 87
Include types in application source list option in drivers 118
Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages 132
Information tab, HP Embedded Web Server 33
input trays.
See
trays
Customization Utility for Windows 230
dialog boxes, Mac OS Classic 243
277
IBM OS/2 printing-system software 253
Macintosh printing-system software 240
system requirements for Macintosh, IBM OS/2, and
system requirements for Windows operating systems
Windows printing-system software 200
Installation Type dialog box, Windows 215
availability by operating system 179
JetAdmin.
See
HP Web JetAdmin
Jetdirect EIO cards, supported 22
Job Storage 99 configuring drivers for 99
operating systems supported 188
278
landscape orientation in drivers 71
landscape orientation option in drivers 106
Choose Setup Language dialog box, Windows 201
localization of software components 181
LaserJet Utility.
See
HP LaserJet Utility
license agreement dialog box, Windows 204
links, HP Embedded Web Server 35
availability of software components 179
printer support Web site 235 system requirements 235
localization, software components 181
LPR commands 49 firmware updates 49
Macintosh operating systems 23
availability of software components 179
dialog boxes, Mac OS Classic printing-system software installation 243
dialog boxes, Mac OS X printing-system software installation 249
directory structure, printing-system software CD-ROM
files and folders added by installation 242
HP LaserJet Utility 236 install notes 236
installing printing-system software 240
setting up printers with Mac OS X 241
uninstalling printing-system software 241
manuals.
See
documentation
media.
See
paper
information about total installed 118
installable options support 173
installable options support 192
installation requirements for Macintosh, IBM OS/2, and
installation requirements for Windows operating systems 195
Index
messages, Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) 132
migration, operating system 263
multipurpose tray.
See
trays
NetWare.
See
Novell NetWare operating systems
bidirectional communication support 185
Windows printing-system software installation 200
Network Printer Configuration dialog box, Windows 209
Network Setup dialog box, Windows 208
Networking tab, HP Embedded Web Server 37
Novell NetWare operating systems 26 bidirectional communication support 26
Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 27
Printer Status and Alerts support 28
online documentation.
See
documentation online help.
See
help
availability of software components 179
bidirectional communication support 26
bidirectional communication support 186
custom preference recall support 188
document layout features support 187
Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 27
HP Driver Preconfiguration support 186
installable options support 192
paper sources supported 191 paper type support 191
Printer Status and Alerts support 28
software component localization 181
stream output mode support 185
Index
optional paper destinations 115
Optional Paper Sources options in drivers 115
ordering software CD-ROMs through the Web 177
orientation options in drivers 71
OS/2.
See
IBM operating systems
Other Pages option in drivers 89
output accessories, enabling 173
Output Bin Options in drivers 103
Page Order option in drivers 139
Pages per Sheet option in drivers 74
First Page option in drivers 89
Include types in application source list option 118
Paper Handling Options in drivers 114
Paper Size option in drivers 135
paper trays.
See
trays
Paper/Output option in drivers 123
Paper/Quality tab in drivers 139
parallel connections, supported 22
bidirectional communication support 186
custom preference recall support 188
document layout features support 187
escape sequence for paper source 258
escape sequence for paper type 263
features for Windows 2000, XP, and Server 2003 132
279
installable options support 192
operating system migration 263
operating systems supported 179
stream output mode support 185
bidirectional communication support 186
document layout features support 187
features for Windows 2000, XP, and Server 2003 132
installable options support 192
operating system migration 263
operating systems supported 179
stream output mode support 185
PDEs (Printer Dialog Extensions) 236
PDF files, command line printing 51
Percentage of Normal Size option in drivers 81
PINs, using for private jobs 100
Point and Print installation 178
operating system migration 265
280
Windows printing-system software 232
port selection dialog box, Windows 207
portrait orientation option in drivers 71
PPD (PS Printer Description) files 179
print controls support in drivers 189
Print Document On option in drivers 81
Print Document On options in drivers 152
Print on Both Sides option in drivers 70
Print Optimizations option 137
Print Page Borders option in drivers 74
Print Quality options in drivers 75
operating systems supported 188
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) 236
printer drivers.
See
drivers
Printer Model information in driver 113
Printer Name dialog box, Windows 216
Printer Sharing dialog box, Windows 217
operating systems supported 28
operating systems supported 179
requirements 39 restrictions that apply to HP products 39
availability of components by operating system 179
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 25 install notes 25
license agreement dialog box, Windows 204
operating systems supported 23
regional and language versions 177
software component localization 181
problems.
See
troubleshooting
Index
bidirectional communication support 186
custom preference recall support 188
document layout features support 187
features for Windows 2000, XP, and Server 2003 132
installable options support 192
operating systems supported 179
stream output mode support 185
PS Printer Description (PPD) files 179
Quick Sets.
See
Print Task Quick Sets
refresh rate, Printer Status and Alerts 41
regional versions for printing-system software 177
remote firmware update 43 description 43 determining current firmware level 43
printer messages 50 troubleshooting 50
resolving problems.
See
troubleshooting
RFU.
See
remote firmware update
Index
Scale to Fit option in drivers 81
Screen Fonts installer, Macintosh 247
screen-readable documentation 25
Select Port dialog box, Windows 207
Send TrueType as Bitmaps option in drivers 138
Set Network Communication Mode dialog box, Windows 213
custom preference recall support 188
Settings tab, HP Embedded Web Server 35
shading, configuring for watermarks 84
silent installer for Windows 230
SNMPv3 (Simple Network Management Protocol, version 3) 37
software.
See
printing-system software
Source is options in drivers 94
Source Is options in drivers 118
Specify Network Path dialog box, Windows 212
stream output mode support 185
terminal servers 23 defined 23 operating systems supported 23
Printer Status and Alerts support 39
text, printing all as black 77
installable options support 192
operating systems and drivers supported 191
281
troubleshooting 37 diagnostics information 37
TrueType, sending as bitmaps 77
two-sided printing options in drivers 70
Type of Connection dialog box, Windows 206
Typical Installation dialog boxes, Windows 200
operating systems supported 179
uninstalling Macintosh printing-system software 241
availability of software components 179
updating firmware remotely.
See
remote firmware update
Use different paper option in drivers 143
version-2 drivers 264 version-3 drivers 264
Watermarks options in drivers 82
Web JetAdmin.
See
HP Web JetAdmin
Web Registration.
See
HP Web Registration
operating system migration 274
Web Update dialog box, Windows 205
Welcome dialog box, Windows 203
availability of software components 179
bidirectional communication support 26
custom installation, printing-system software 219
dialog boxes, Typical Installation 200
directory structure, printing-system software CD-ROM
driver features for 2000, XP, and Server 2003 132
Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 27
282
installing printer software 200
PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features 63
Point and Print installation 232
Printer Status and Alerts support 28
printer support for Windows 3.1x 195
Index
© 200 3 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, LP
Download
Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Document public link
Advertisement
Key features
Fast print speeds of up to 32 ppm in color and 45 ppm in black and white
High-resolution printing of up to 1200 dpi for sharp, detailed text and graphics
Large paper capacity of up to 3,100 sheets for extended uninterrupted printing
Versatile media handling options, including envelopes, labels, and transparencies
Automatic duplex printing for double-sided printing without manual intervention
Built-in networking for easy sharing on a network
Easy-to-use control panel with a large color display
Support for mobile printing through HP ePrint and Apple AirPrint
Frequently asked questions
The maximum print speed is up to 32 ppm in color and 45 ppm in black and white.
The maximum resolution is up to 1200 dpi.
Yes, the HP Color LaserJet 9500 Printer series supports automatic duplex printing for double-sided printing without manual intervention.
